JP2023092589A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine for enhancing interest in a jackpot informing performance.SOLUTION: A game machine can execute a specific performance for suggesting whether or not control is performed to an advantageous state, the specific performance is composed of a first part, and a second part executed after the first part, the game machine can execute a special performance for reducing visibility of display means in the first part and the second part, can output a first performance sound from sound output means in execution of the special performance in the first part, and can output a second performance sound differing from the first performance sound from the sound output means in execution of the special performance in the second part, and the second performance sound is composed of a particularly processed speech sound and an effect sound.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine capable of playing games.

Conventionally, there has been a game machine provided with a jackpot notification performance.

JP 2015-211759 A

With respect to the game machine that executes the effect as described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improvement in the notification effect during the big hit.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and an object of the present invention is to improve the interest of the big hit notification performance.

A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
display means (image display device 5);
sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R);
With production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production,
The production control means is
It is possible to execute a specific effect (battle SP effect) that suggests whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state,
The specific effect consists of a first part (first half of battle SP) and a second part (second half of battle SP) executed after the first part,
In the first part and the second part, a special effect (first half of battle SP: CU effect, second half of battle SP: second normal jackpot notification effect) that reduces the visibility of the display means can be executed. can be,
When the special effect is executed in the first part, a first effect sound (effect sound B) can be output from the sound output means,
When the special effect is executed in the second part, a second effect sound (effect sound C2) different from the first effect sound can be output from the sound output means,
The second effect sound is composed of specially processed dialog sound and effect sound (effect sound C2 is scratched).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute an effect that lowers the visibility of the display means in both the special effect of the first part and the special effect of the second part. On the other hand, by specially processing the second performance sound, the production cost of performance and the processing load of performance control can be reduced while clarifying the difference between the special performance of the first part and the special performance of the second part.

In addition, the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention and the configuration other than the matters specifying the invention. may have.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 152F. It is a figure which shows a hit classification table. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit determination table and a big-hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is a flowchart which shows a starting opening switch passage process. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows small hit opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows processing during small hit opening. It is a flow chart which shows small hit end processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot classification table in the characteristic part 05TM. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; (A1) and (A2) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables, and (B1), (B2-1) and (B2-2) are explanatory diagrams showing big hit type determination tables. It is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern determination table in the normal mode. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table in rush mode; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an effect sound type table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an output mode regarding the effect sound. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a graph related to sound impact; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect sound type table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect sound type table; FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of complementary color contrast; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding a movable body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a game flow. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process at the time of starting winning a prize. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a table referred to in the start winning effect determination process; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a table referred to in the start winning effect determination process; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a table referred to in the start winning effect determination process; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding normal change production|presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to a change portent effect; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding special change production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding special change production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding special change production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding special change production|presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode relating to a look-ahead forewarning effect of the change portent effect; It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process at the time of a fluctuation start. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process at the time of a fluctuation start. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a table referred to in the process of determining effect at the start of fluctuation; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the development flow of SP reach production|presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a production mode related to story SP development production; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a production mode related to story SP development production; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a production mode related to story SP development production; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a rendering mode related to a CU rendering; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding the big-hit information production|presentation at the time of 1st normal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding the big-hit information production|presentation at the time of 1st normal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding the big hit information production|presentation at the time of 2nd normal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding the big hit information production|presentation at the time of 2nd normal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding the big hit information production|presentation at the time of 2nd normal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding the big hit information production|presentation at the time of 2nd normal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding the big-hit information production|presentation at the time of 3rd normal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding the big-hit information production|presentation at the time of 3rd normal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding the big-hit information production|presentation at the time of 3rd normal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding the big-hit information production|presentation at the time of 3rd normal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding resurrection production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding resurrection production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding resurrection production|presentation. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode regarding round display; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of execution timing of a V-stock effect; It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process at the time of a big-hit start. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table referred by the production|presentation determination process at the time of a big-hit start. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding a jackpot type information production|presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode when the first V-stock effect is not executed in the big hit; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding when 1st V stock is performed in a jackpot fanfare period. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding when 1st V stock is performed in a jackpot fanfare period. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding when 1st V stock is performed in a jackpot fanfare period. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode regarding when the first V stock is executed during the jackpot round period; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode regarding when the first V stock is executed during the jackpot round period; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode regarding when the first V stock is executed during the jackpot round period; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode regarding when the first V stock is executed during the jackpot round period; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production determination processing at the time of jackpot end. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode when selecting a rush mode effect mode; It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process at the time of waiting for the start of fluctuation. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of execution/non-execution determination processing for the second V stock effect at the start of fluctuation. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding when 2nd V stock production|presentation is not performed in a time saving state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding when 2nd V stock production|presentation is performed in a time saving state. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a rendering mode regarding a round display after a V-stock rendering; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding time saving rush production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding time saving rush production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding time saving rush production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding annihilation SP production|presentation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an output mode regarding the effect sound in the annihilation SP effect; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding the big-hit information production|presentation at the time of 1st hitting to the right. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding the special big-hit information production|presentation at the time of 1st hitting to the right. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding the big-hit information production|presentation at the time of the 2nd right hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding the special big-hit information production|presentation at the time of 2nd hitting to the right. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding the big-hit information production|presentation at the time of the 3rd right hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding the special big-hit information production|presentation at the time of the 3rd right hit. It is an explanatory view showing a reproduction output period table of the effect sound in the jackpot notification effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of the production|presentation regarding a series of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of the production|presentation regarding a series of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of the production|presentation regarding a series of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding a series of effects in this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding a series of effects in this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding a series of effects in this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding a series of effects in this embodiment.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. The suspended display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display. Further, the suspended display corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol whose execution is suspended is called "first suspended display", and the suspended display corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol whose execution is suspended is " "second pending display". Note that the first pending display and the second pending display are appropriately collectively referred to as "holding display".

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is in the ON state, the big winning gate door opens the big winning gate, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big winning gate. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, when a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol varies depending on the type of the big hit to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In this embodiment, it is assumed that control is performed to the time-saving state based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol being "big hit". However, not limited to such a form, the display result of the variable display of the special symbols may be controlled to the time-saving state based on an opportunity other than the "jackpot".

For example, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbols, "loss with time saving" may be provided. When the winning pattern with time saving is stop-displayed, the time saving control is controlled to the time saving state B (for example, chance time of 7 times of time saving times) in which the time saving control is performed for the first predetermined number of times. In addition, when 500 fluctuations are performed without being controlled to a big hit in a low-probability state, time-saving control is performed a second predetermined number of times. . However, after the end of the time saving state C, even if the change is performed again 500 times without being controlled to a big hit in the low probability state, the time saving state C is not controlled again based on this.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of Effects, etc.) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and making the game lively) are executed in accordance with the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is a "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of the ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some of the big-hit types (in the big-hit type of the big-hit game state in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (ReadOnlyMemory) 101, a RAM (RandomAccessMemory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (VideoRAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that designates the game state before the power cut that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that designates the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the probability variable state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting a round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is a "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution count, and a jackpot gaming state when the upper limit execution count is reached. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. In addition, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is ended.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Portion 152F)
Next, the characteristic portion 152F of this embodiment will be described. As for the characteristic portion 152F, a technique for a pachinko machine capable of setting, by setting means, setting values such as the odds of winning a jackpot with different degrees of advantage for the player will be described. The game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) also has a function as setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player as the set value of the winning probability of the big win. .

First, setting values will be described. In the pachinko game machine 1 described in this example, the odds of winning a jackpot change depending on the set value when a person on the game hall side (such as a store clerk at the game hall) changes settings using operating means such as predetermined switches. It is configured.

For example, in the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103), a setting change process is executed to change the jackpot winning probability set in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the setting change operation. As a result, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, by using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value, the setting change process that allows the probability of winning the big hit to be changed is executed. The set value consists of six stages (multiple stages) from 1 to 6, for example, and the probability of winning a big hit increases in the order of set value 1<set value 2<set value 3<set value 4<set value 5<set value 6. That is, when setting value 1 is set as the setting value, the degree of advantage for the player is the lowest, and the degree of advantage increases in the order of setting value 2<setting value 3<setting value 4<setting value 5<setting value 6. increase step by step. It should be noted that the set values are not limited to six stages as long as they are provided in a plurality of stages. Since the ball output rate (the number of balls output per unit time (the number of prize balls)) changes in accordance with the possibility of changing the winning probability of the big hit in this way, changing the setting value changes the ball output rate. It can also be said that it is to do.

For example, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability of winning a big hit changes according to the selection of the set value by the setting change operation when the power is turned on. Of the six levels of setting values, for example, setting values 4 to 6 are called high setting with a high probability of winning a big win, and setting values 1 to 3 are called low setting with a low probability of winning a big win.

Also, the selection probability of the type of jackpot may be changed by setting the set values 1 to 6 in the same manner as the winning probability of the jackpot. The selection probability of the variation pattern type may be changed by setting the set value 1 to the set value 6 as well as the winning probability of the big win. The selection probability of the variation pattern may be changed by setting the set value 1 to the set value 6 as well as the winning probability of the big win.

Regarding the characteristic portion 152F, in a pachinko game machine in which any one of a plurality of set values can be set, when the jackpot game state is controlled, the RAM 122 as a pending storage buffer is hit (jackpot or small hit). There is a case where a hold series in which hold information determined to be controlled by hit is stored is executed. Concretely, the pending series is the pending information that exists when the big win occurs, and there is pending information that will become a hit in the future, and after the big win gaming state ends, the pending information that existed when the big win occurred. It refers to continuous hits within the reservation information range in which the next hits occur continuously within the range of (reserved). In the case of a small win, a big win via a small win is made based on the occurrence of a V prize, so the reserve information of a small win can be said to be the reserve storage information of a win that will become a big win in the future. When such a holding series is executed, there is a case where an informing effect for informing that it is a holding series is executed.

FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 152F. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 152F, the same reference numerals and explanations as those in the front view of the pachinko game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 are omitted, and different parts will be explained.

In the game area where the hit game ball can flow down, the first path of the downflow paths for the game ball is mainly provided in the area on the left side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front, and the game is played. A second route, which is different from the first route, is mainly provided in a region on the right side of the image display device 5 as viewed from the front.

Hitting a game ball into the left area (left game area) of the image display device 5 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the first path is called left hitting. Hitting a game ball into the right area (right game area) of the image display device 5 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the second path is called right hitting. The first path may be called a left-handed path because it is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by striking the game ball to the left side of the game area. Also, the second path may be called a right-handed path because it is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by striking the game ball to the right side of the game area.

Note that the first route and the second route may be composed of separate routes, or may be routes that are partly shared. The left game area and the right game area may be separated by, for example, the end face of the image display device 5 and the arrangement of the game nails in the game area.

The game ball fired from the ball shooting device in response to the operation of the ball operating handle 30 and hit into the game area is guided to the left game area along, for example, the arrangement of the game nails. As a result, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide to the right game area. In addition, when the game ball is guided to the right game area, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide it to the left game area by being guided along the arrangement of the game nails, for example.

A winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning hole is provided as a structure into which game balls hit in the left game area of the game areas can enter. The winning ball device 6A is arranged below the image display device 5 . The winning ball device 6A is provided with a first starting opening switch 22A for detecting a game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening.

A passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a V determination winning device 87 are provided as structures into which game balls hit into the right game area of the game areas can enter. The variable winning ball device 6B has a second starting winning hole in which game balls can win. In addition, as switches for detecting game balls that have entered the respective passage gates 41, there is a gate switch 21 inside the passage gate 41, a second start opening switch 22B inside the second start winning opening, and a V judgment winning device 87. A V winning switch 87a, a V determination winning switch 15a, and a V determination discharge switch 15b are provided inside.

In the left game area, a game nail is planted so that a game ball is guided to the first starting prize winning opening of the winning prize opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to enter the game ball into the first start winning hole, the player can hit the game ball to the left. Also, in the right game area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the second start winning opening and the passing gate 41 among the winning opening structures. Therefore, when aiming for the game ball to enter the second starting prize-winning opening and the passage gate 41, the player can hit the game ball to the right.

The passage gate 41 is a gate structure into which a game ball can enter (pass). When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, normal symbols are variably displayed. The normal pattern will be described later. In the left game area, a game nail is planted so that a game ball is guided to the first starting prize winning opening of the winning prize opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to enter the game ball into the first start winning hole, the player can hit the game ball to the left. Also, in the right game area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the second start winning opening and the passing gate 41 among the winning opening structures. Therefore, when aiming for the game ball to enter the second starting prize-winning opening and the passage gate 41, the player can hit the game ball to the right.

The V judgment winning device 87 is a device for judging V winning of a game ball, which is a condition for generating a big hit when a small hit occurs.

The V-judgment winning device 87 is made of a transparent member, and a state in which a game ball passes through it can be visually recognized. The V-judgment winning device 87 is provided with a width that allows game balls to pass in the front-rear direction at the top, and walls are formed on both sides (front side and back side) of a passage that is inclined from right to left and extends in the left-right direction. A part is provided, and a guide path along which game balls are guided is formed. In the central part of the guide, when a small hit is made, a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds × 10 times open period + 1 second closed period (interval period) × 9 times + 1 second end period) By repeating opening and closing, an operation opening is formed as an opening that allows a total of about 10 or more game balls to win within a predetermined period of time during which the opening is open. In the path of the game ball in the V judgment winning device 87, a plurality of protrusions as deceleration means for decelerating the game ball to be guided are provided on both sides of the wall portion in a manner that alternately protrudes, so that when hitting to the right A structure (hereinafter referred to as deceleration structure) is formed in which the game balls slowly flow through the passage above the operation opening of the upper portion of the V judgment winning device 87 .

In the small hit game state, the V judgment winning device 87 is operated for a relatively long period of time until it is detected that 10 game balls have entered the V judgment winning device 87, or until a predetermined period of time elapses. Opening control is executed. In the V-judgment winning device 87 , the portion of the guideway where the operating opening is not formed forms a fixed passage called a fixed portion 873 . A movable portion 872 capable of moving back and forth over the operating port is provided at a position where the operating port can be opened and closed.

The movable portion 872 is driven by the solenoid 22 and can move forward and backward to open and close the operation port. In the state where the operation port is closed by the state of the movable part 872, the game ball can pass through the upper surface of the movable part 872 and the fixed part 873 as a guide path, and is guided from the right end to the left end on the guide path and falls from the left end. do. When the operating port is opened by the operating state of the movable portion 872, the operating port is opened in the guideway, so that the game ball guided to the guideway can drop from the operating port into the V judgment winning device 87. Become.

Inside the V judgment prize winning device 87 (actuation opening), a V prize winning region 870 as a specific region is located at the center of the bottom of the V judgment prize winning device 87 in the horizontal direction as a prize winning region in which a game ball entering from the operation opening can win. Further, an inclined path is provided to guide all the game balls entered from the operation opening onto the V winning area 870 by an inclined path. The V winning area 870 has a V winning opening into which a game ball can enter, and can guide downward the gaming ball entering from the V winning opening.

At the top end of the winning opening (V winning opening) of the V winning area 870, there is provided a plate-like opening/closing member (not shown) capable of switching the V winning area 870 between an open state and a closed state. there is The opening/closing member is driven by a solenoid 22 and is capable of advancing and retreating to open and close the V winning opening. When the V winning opening is opened by the state of the opening/closing member, the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 can drop into the V winning area 870 . On the other hand, in the state where the V winning opening is closed by the state of the opening/closing member, the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 passes over the opening/closing member and opens near the downstream side of the V winning area 870. , and can fall into a winning ball area (not shown) that can guide the game downward.

Specifically, the V winning area 870 of the V determination winning device 87 is basically in an open state. When the game ball enters the V winning area 870 and wins, the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 87 a provided in the V winning area 870 . In the small winning game state, when one game ball is detected by the V winning prize switch 87a, the opening/closing member is controlled to the closed state, and the game ball guided onto the V winning prize area 870 after that is within the winning ball area. will enter the A game ball that has entered the winning ball area is detected by the V determination winning switch 15a provided in the winning ball area. As a result, one game ball entering the V judgment prize winning device 87 is detected by the V judgment prize switch 87a, and the subsequent game balls are detected by the V judgment prize prize switch 15a.

When the total number of balls detected by the V winning switch 87a and the V determination winning switch 15a reaches 10, the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 opened in the small winning game state is closed, and the game ball enters. made impossible. The V winning area 870 and the winning ball area are configured to merge in the lower part, and a game ball that has entered the V determination winning device 87 through the merged discharge passage is discharged into a predetermined area inside the game board 2. It is discharged to the discharge channel. The discharge passage is provided with a V judgment discharge switch 15b capable of detecting discharged game balls, and all the discharged game balls are detected by the switch.

When a small hit occurs and the operation port of the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened, the game ball enters the V prize winning region 870 and is detected by the V winning prize switch 87a during a predetermined effective period. , the conditions for generating a big hit are established, and the game is controlled to a big-hit game state. Winning of a game ball to such a V winning area 870 is called V winning. In the pachinko game machine 1, during the period in which a small hit occurs and the operation opening of the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened as described above, a total of about 10 game balls are produced on average without requiring any special operation. can enter the V-judgment winning device 87, and furthermore, when a game ball can enter the V-judgment winning device 87, the game ball will surely (100%) enter the V winning area It is structurally designed to enter the 870. In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1, when a small hit occurs, right-hand hitting promotion notification is executed to instruct right-hand hitting so that the player can easily hit the game ball into the V judgment winning device 87. be.

Therefore, when a small hit occurs, except when the player does not shoot the game ball during the opening period of the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 and when the player hits to the left, it is possible to hit to the right. In this case, the game ball will surely (100%) enter the V winning area 870 and a big hit will occur.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example in which the V-judgment winning device 87 is provided with a game ball deceleration structure is shown. However, such a deceleration structure is not provided, and an operation opening that allows the game ball to fall is provided in a part of the guide path of the game ball in the V judgment winning device 87, and during the period of the small winning game state In order to allow about 10 game balls to enter the V winning area 870, a configuration may be used in which the operation opening is opened 10 times.

In the right game area, a game nail is planted so that a game ball is guided to the variable winning ball device 6B and the V determination winning device 87.例文帳に追加Therefore, when aiming to make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 6B and the V determination winning device 87, the player can hit the game ball to the right.

It should be noted that there is a possibility that a game ball hit into the left game area may enter either the variable winning ball device 6B or the V judgment winning device 87. It is desirable that the possibility is extremely low compared to the possibility that a game ball hit into the right game area will enter them.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the game area. In the special variable winning ball device 7, a game ball hit to the right is guided by a game nail planted in the right game area. Also, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the game ball does not enter from the left game area depending on the state of the game nail being planted.

The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening whose front is covered with a rectangular door, and when a big hit occurs, the solenoid tilts the door forward about the bottom side to reveal the big winning opening ( opening). Inside the special variable winning ball device 7, a count switch 23 is provided for detecting entering game balls. To the special variable winning ball device 7, a winning route is defined by a game nail or other structures so that a game ball can enter the big winning opening only when the game ball is hit in the right game area. Limited. It should be noted that even if the game ball is struck in either the left game area or the right game area, it may be possible to win the big prize opening.

In the above-described embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 having the big winning hole and the V determination winning device 87 for determining V winning have been shown as different devices. However, the special variable winning ball device 7 having the big winning hole and the V determination winning device 87 for determining V winning may be a common device.

For example, a V determination winning device 87 for determining V winning may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 having the big winning opening. In this case, the game ball entering the big winning hole enters the V judgment winning device 87 as it is.

The big hit is when the big win pattern (big hit display result) is derived and displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A, and when the big win pattern (big win display result) is derived and displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B. occurs in When a big win is determined by a lottery based on the winning of a game ball in the first starting winning hole, a big win pattern is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A. When a big win is decided by a lottery based on the winning of a game ball in the second start winning hole, the big win pattern is derived and displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B.

A big hit is also generated when a game ball entered while the operation opening of the V judgment prize device 87 is open due to the small win game state entering the V prize area 870. - 特許庁Hereinafter, when a game ball enters the V winning area 870 and is detected by the V winning switch 87a, this is referred to as V winning. A small win is a win in which the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened as a predetermined value, and a big win can occur on the condition of V winning. In the V judgment winning device 87, a game state in which the operation opening is opened is called a "small hit game state". Then, in the small winning game state, a big win generated based on the fact that the game ball wins V is called a "big win via a small winning". On the other hand, a big hit game state based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is called "big hit by special symbol".

The jackpot game state is a specific game state (advantageous state) that is advantageous to the player as a given value, and the special variable winning ball device 7 repeats the open state and the closed state for a predetermined number of times. In the repeat continuation control, a state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is open (the big winning opening is open) is called a round. Repeat continuation control is also called round control.

In the jackpot game state, after the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state, a predetermined condition for terminating the open state (a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or a predetermined number (for example, 10 The closed state is established in response to the establishment of the opening end condition that the winning ball of 1) has been generated. Then, when the opening end condition is established, the continuation right is generated, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of openings in the jackpot game state reaches 15 rounds (final round), which is a predetermined upper limit value.

In the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first starting condition (first execution condition) or the second starting condition (second execution condition), which is the execution condition of the variable display, is established (for example, the game ball After passing (including winning) the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening as the starting winning area, the condition for starting the variable display (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is The game is started based on establishment of a state of non-execution and non-execution of a jackpot game, and after a fluctuation display time (variation time) elapses, a display result (stop pattern) is derived and displayed. It should be noted that the passage of the game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined winning area such as a winning opening or a gate, and the concept includes the game ball entering (winning) the winning opening. is. Further, deriving and displaying the display result means finally stopping display (determined display) of the pattern (an example of the identification information).

In addition, regarding the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the game ball has entered the starting area such as the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, it is still started within the range of the predetermined upper limit number. Storing information about variable displays for which the conditions are not met is called pending storage. The term "reserved storage" is also used to indicate (specify) information that has been retained. A pending memory is also called a starting memory or a starting winning memory.

As for the first special symbol, the variable display is executed based on the first reserved memory as the reserved memory based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening. As for the second special symbol, the variable display is executed based on the second reserved memory as the reserved memory based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening. When a big win occurs in a state where such a first reserve memory or a second reserve memory exists, the reserve memory that existed before the occurrence of the big win is maintained as it is, and a variable display is performed after the end of the jackpot game state. used for

When the second start winning to the second start winning opening occurs, even if there is a pending memory of the first start winning, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the second starting winning is preferentially executed. be. In this way, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special 2 priority digestion" as appropriate).

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which Special 2 priority digestion is performed has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and Special 2 priority digestion may not be performed.

For example, (A) the variable display of the first special symbol may be executed with priority over the variable display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special 1 priority digestion" as appropriate), (B) The variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed at the same time (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "special 1 special 2 simultaneous digestion").

Above the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a second reserve consisting of four displays for displaying the number of valid winning balls entering the second start winning opening, that is, the number of second reserve memories. A display 25B is provided. The second holding indicator 25B increases the number of indicators lit up by 1 each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time the variable display on the second special symbol display device 4B is started, the number of indicators to be lit is reduced by one.

Further above the second reservation display 25B, there is provided a first reservation display 25A consisting of four displays for displaying the number of valid winning balls entered into the first start winning opening, that is, the number of first reservation storage. . The first pending indicator 25A increases the number of indicator lights by 1 each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time the variable display on the first special symbol display device 4A is started, the number of indicators to be lit is reduced by one.

In the pachinko game machine 1, depending on the game situation, the player shoots the game balls so as to selectively use "left shot" aiming at the left game area and "right shot" aiming at the right game area. A game state and a performance state are controlled so that a rich game can be enjoyed. The flow of the game after the player starts playing in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below.

When the player takes a seat in the pachinko game machine 1 and starts the game for the first time, the player first plays the game so that the game ball wins the first start winning hole by striking to the left. Then, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, and if the display result is a big hit (big hit by the special symbol), the left-hand shot is switched to the right-hand shot, and the game is played aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 which is opened. . After the jackpot game state is over, right-handed promotion notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to play the game by right-handed. Specifically, a message such as “Aim right” is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 .

During the jackpot game state, a game is played aiming at the opened special variable winning ball device 7 by striking to the right. During the jackpot game state, right-handed promotion notification is performed. After the jackpot game state is over, the game is continued by hitting to the right when the later-described time-saving state is reached. After the jackpot game is finished, if the time saving state is set, the time saving notification for notifying that the time saving state is started is performed on the screen of the image display device 5.例文帳に追加In addition, during the time saving state, right-handed promotion information is also performed. If the time-saving state does not occur after the end of the jackpot game state, the right-hand hit is switched to the left-hand hit by the end of the right-handed promotion notification executed during the jackpot game state, and the game ball wins the first start prize-winning port. Play games like this. In addition, when the time saving state does not occur, left-handed promotion notification (also called left-handed notification) is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to return to left handed and play the game. may

During the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game, the game is performed aiming at the variable winning ball device 6B having the second starting winning hole by striking to the right. When a game ball enters the second start winning hole and the display result becomes a big win (a big win by a special pattern), a game is played aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 while striking to the right. Also, if the game ball wins in the second starting winning hole and the display result becomes a small winning display result, the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened in the small winning game state, so V judgment is made while striking to the right. A game is played aiming at the winning device 87 . At the start of the small-hit game state, a small-hit start notification is provided on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify the start of the small-hit game state. In addition, when it is controlled to the small hit game state, the start timing of the small hit display executed before the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened according to the game situation (depending on the game situation) , or at a predetermined timing before the execution of the small hit display), the right hitting promotion notification is also performed.

When the operation opening of the V judgment prize winning device 87 is in the open state due to the small hit game state, the game ball falls from the operation opening into the V judgment prize winning device 87, enters the V prize winning area 870 and is detected, When a V prize is generated, a big win is generated via a small win. When a V prize has been won, a V prize is announced on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the V prize has been won. Further, when the small-hit game state ends, a small-hit end notification for notifying that the small-hit game state has ended is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 . After the end of the small win, a big win game state is entered and the special variable winning ball device 7 is released, so the player plays the game aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 while striking to the right.

Further, when a game is performed aiming at the V judgment winning device 87 in the small winning game state, if the game ball does not enter the V winning area 870 and enters a non-specific area other than the V winning area 870, a big win is performed. does not occur. Thus, when V winning is not generated during the small winning game state, V winning failure notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the V winning has failed. Further, at the end of the small winning game state, a small winning end notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small winning game state has ended. After the end of the small winning game state, when the time saving state continues, the player continues to play the game aiming at the variable winning ball device 6B while striking to the right. When the time-saving state ends, the game is played so that the game ball wins in the first start prize-winning hole by switching from right-hand hitting to left-hand hitting. At the end of the time-saving state, a time-saving termination notification for notifying that the time-saving is finished on the screen of the image display device 5 and a left-handed promotion notification for urging the player to return to left-handed and play the game are performed.

FIG. 8-2 is a diagram showing a winning type table. The winning type table shows, for each winning type, conditions for occurrence of a big win, a control state (game state) after a big win, the number of openings (number of rounds) in a big win, and the opening time of each round in a big win. In this embodiment, as the jackpot types, the pattern 15R short-time big hit, the pattern 4R short-time big hit, the small hit via 16 (15) R short-time big hit, the small hit 9 (8) R short-time big hit, and the small hit 5 (4) ) R time-saving jackpot is provided. The number in parentheses of the big hit via the small hit indicates the number of times the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened.

A small hit occurs when a game ball enters a second start winning hole provided in the variable winning ball device 6B and the display result of the second special symbol becomes a small winning symbol. Determination as to whether or not the display result of the special symbol is to be a small winning symbol is performed in advance by a random number lottery (small winning determination of the special symbol). When a small win occurs, a small win game state is entered, and the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened with an opening pattern of 10 opening times and 0.1 second opening time. The game control state after the end of the small hit game state (big hit probability, small hit probability, base, which will be described later) is the same as before the small hit. In the small win, a prize ball is paid out to the game ball that has won the V prize area 870 in the V judgment prize winning device 87 during the small win game state. During the small winning game state, it is set that about 10 winning balls can be generated, and it is set that about 30 winning balls can be paid out according to the winning balls.

When the operation port of the V determination prize winning device 87 is open, the game ball is entered into the operation port, and the game ball enters the V prize area 870 inside the V determination prize winning device 87 (V winning), a big hit occurs. do. A big win via such a small win is called a big win via a small win. Jackpots via small hits include 16 (15) R-time short jackpots via small hits, 9 (8) R-time short jackpots via small hits, and 5 (4) R-short time jackpots via small hits with different numbers of rounds in the jackpot. be A small hit that is linked so as to be a 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot is called a first small win. 9 (8) The small hit that is linked to be the R time-saving jackpot is called the second small hit. 5 (4) The small hit that is linked to be the R time-saving jackpot is called the third small win.

On the other hand, a big hit that is generated directly by a variable display of special symbols without going through a small win is called a big hit in design. The symbol jackpot includes a symbol 15R time-saving jackpot and a symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, which are generated directly based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this way, the big wins are the symbol big win directly generated based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the V winning via the small winning based on the variable display of the second special symbol. It includes a big hit via a small hit. Each of the symbol jackpot and the jackpot via the jackpot is a jackpot that is controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends, and is called a time-saving jackpot. The advantageous state advantageous to the player in this embodiment also includes the opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 .

The pattern 15R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the jackpot is opened 15 times (15R). The pattern 4R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the big prize opening is opened four times (4R). In the 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, after the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big prize opening is opened 15 times (15R) under the condition of V winning. The prize winning device is opened for 16 rounds, but the number of times the big prize opening is actually opened is 15, and the player can win the same big prize as the pattern 15R short time jackpot with regard to opening the big prize opening. I feel categorical. The 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot is a jackpot in which the big jackpot is opened 8 times (8R) under the condition of V prize after the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened (0.1 seconds x 10 times). is. In the 5 (4) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, after the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big prize opening is opened 4 times (4R) under the condition of V winning. The winning device is opened for 5 rounds, but the number of openings of the big winning opening is substantially 4, and the player can win the same big winning as the pattern 4R short-time jackpot with regard to opening the big winning opening. I feel categorical.

The time-saving state after the symbol 4R time-saving big hit is the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is 1, and the end condition that the total number of times of variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 5 times. Two end states are set for . Such a number of time-saving end conditions that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is 1 time is considered that the game ball entering the V judgment winning device 87 enters the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. is set as In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the termination condition that the number of fluctuation display times of the second special symbol is 1 time, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed, at a rate of about 1/7, there is a possibility of generating a big hit via a small hit. is a certain number of times.

The number of times of the time-saving end condition that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is once is set for the following reasons. In the case of the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, basically, the time-saving state (including electric power supply state) is continued until the variable display of the second special symbol is completed once, but in order to variably display the second special symbol, It is necessary to make the game ball enter the passage gate 41 by striking to the right to open the variable winning ball device 6B, and to make the game ball win the variable winning ball device 6B in that state, such a variable winning ball device. It may take a long time to win the game ball to 6B, and the first special symbol retained and stored may be variably displayed first.

Therefore, the end condition that the total number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is five times is a big hit immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the fluctuation display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. Even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started by the reserved memory based on the first start prize which can be stored up to four before the game state, one of the second special symbols which is likely to be determined as a big win advantageous to the player. This is a condition for ensuring that the variable display for batches can be executed. By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol by the reserved memory based on the first start winning is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, so that in the time saving state, it is likely to be determined to be an advantageous big hit for the player. It is possible to prevent the fluctuation display of the second special symbol from being stopped.

After the big hit other than the 4R time-saving big hit, the end condition is that the number of times the second special symbol is displayed is seven times, and the end condition is that the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed is 11 times. Two end states are set for . Such a number of 7 times of the end condition of the time-saving state is set in consideration of the fact that game balls entering the V judgment winning device 87 enter the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is 7 times, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, compared to the symbol 4R short time big hit, there is a possibility of generating a big hit via a small hit. is the number of times that is significantly higher. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the occurrence of the big win via the small win, and the player's expectation for the occurrence of the big win via the small win can be enhanced.

In addition, the end condition that the total number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 times is a big hit immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the fluctuation display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. Even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started by the reserved memory based on the first start prize which can be stored up to four before the game state, 7 of the second special symbol which is likely to be determined as a big win advantageous to the player. This is to ensure that the variable display of the variable number of times can be executed. By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol by the reserved memory based on the first start prize is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, so that it is easy to determine a big win advantageous to the player in the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol from decreasing.

In this embodiment, in the low base state, which is the normal state, the first start winning port is provided so that the game ball can win from the first path. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of starting winnings than when the game ball flows down the path. On the other hand, in an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 that is opened is provided so as to be able to win a prize from the second path. It is more advantageous for the player in terms of winning a prize at the time of a big hit than when the game ball flows down. In addition, in a specific state such as a small winning game state, the V judgment winning device 87 that is opened is provided so as to be able to win from the second path, so that the game ball flowing down the second path is more likely to flow down the first path. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of the occurrence of a big hit than when the game ball flows down.

It should be noted that the comparison of advantages is not limited to this, and for example, other winning openings (for example, another variable winning opening (whether for starting winning or non-starting winning) may be used in the first route). and the second path, and in the low base state as the normal state, the first path is easier to win the variable winning slot than the second path, and the high base state, the big win game state, and the small In other states such as a winning game state, the second route is more likely to win the variable winning slot than the first route. A configuration may be adopted in which it is advantageous for the player to flow down, and in other game states, it is advantageous for the player to have the game medium flow down the second path.

FIG. 8-3 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 8-3 shows the random number type, update range, use, and addition conditions. Each random number is used as follows.

(1) Random R: A random counter for determining whether or not to give a big hit and whether or not to give a small win. The random 1 is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, updated from 0 to 65535 which is the upper limit, and then updated from 0 again. (2) Random 1: Type of jackpot (type, pattern 15R short-time jackpot, pattern 4R short-time jackpot, via small hit 16 (15) R short-time jackpot, via small hit 9 (8) R short-time jackpot, and via small hit 5 (4) Any type of R time-saving jackpot) and a jackpot pattern are determined (for jackpot type determination, jackpot pattern determination). (3) Random 2: Determine the type (type) of the fluctuation pattern (for fluctuation pattern type determination). (4) Random 3: Determine the variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination). (5) Random 4: Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal design (for normal design hit determination). (6) Random 5: Determine the initial value of Random 5 (for determining the initial value of Random 5).

In this embodiment, the big hits in the specific game state are a symbol 15R short time big hit, a symbol 4R short time big hit, a small win via a 16 (15) R short time big hit, a small win via a 9 (8) R short time big hit, and a small hit. A plurality of types of Via 5 (4) R time-saving jackpot are included. Therefore, when it is determined to be a big hit based on the value of the random number for judging the hit (random R), or when it is determined to be a small hit, based on the value of the random number for judging the big hit type (random 1) Then, the type of jackpot is determined to be one of these jackpot types. However, in the case of a big win via a small win, the decided big win becomes invalid unless a V winning occurs. Furthermore, when the jackpot type is determined, the jackpot pattern is also determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1). Therefore, the random number 1 is also the random number for determining the jackpot symbol. Also, when it is determined to be the type of the small hit, the design of the small hit is determined at the same time. Therefore, random 1 is also a small winning symbol determination random number.

In addition, the variation pattern first determines the variation pattern type using the random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 2), and uses the random number for determining the variation pattern (random 3), any included in the determined variation pattern type Determine the variation pattern. As such, in this embodiment, a variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is obtained by grouping a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is classified into a normal fluctuation pattern type that is a fluctuation pattern type without reach and a reach fluctuation pattern type that is a fluctuation pattern type with reach.

FIG. 8-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a first special prize determination table, a second special prize determination table, and various jackpot type determination tables. These tables are stored in the ROM 101. FIG.

FIG. 8-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the first special figure hit determination table. The first special symbol winning judgment table is a data table for making a big winning judgment with respect to the first special symbol, and is a table in which a big winning judgment value to be compared with the random R is set. "Probability" shown in FIG. 8-4(A) indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a big hit.

The jackpot probability of the first special symbol differs according to the set value. Setting 1 is 1/199, setting 2 is 1/190, setting 3 is 1/180, setting 4 is 1/170, setting 5 is 1/160, and setting 6 is 1/150. Therefore, the big hit probability is high in the order of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6.

FIG. 8-4(B) is an explanatory diagram showing the second special figure per determination table. The second special hit determination table is a data table for judging a big hit and a small hit with respect to the second special symbol, and is set with a big hit determination value and a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R. It is a table with The upper stage in FIG. 8-4(B) is the big hit determination table portion, and the lower stage in FIG. 8-4(B) is the small hit determination table portion. The "probability" shown in the upper part of Fig. 8-4 (B) indicates the probability (percentage) of getting a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the lower part of Fig. 8-4 (B) indicates the probability (percentage) of getting a small hit. .

The jackpot probability of the second special symbol differs according to the set value. Setting 1 is 1/199, setting 2 is 1/190, setting 3 is 1/180, setting 4 is 1/170, setting 5 is 1/160, and setting 6 is 1/150. Therefore, the big hit probability is high in the order of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6. On the other hand, the small hit probability of the second special symbol is set to 1/7.35 regardless of the set value. In addition, you may provide a small hit in the 1st special design. In such a case, it is desirable that the probability of winning a small hit is lower for the first special symbol than for the second special symbol. For example, the small hit probability of the first special symbol may be set to 1/100.

When the CPU 103 detects the starting winning to the first starting winning opening (first starting winning) or the starting winning to the second starting winning opening (second starting winning), the random number circuit 124 is activated at a predetermined timing. is extracted (random R). As for the first starting prize, the extracted value is compared with the big hit judgment value set in the first special prize judgment table, and when the extracted value matches any one of the big hit judgment values, a big hit is given with respect to the first special pattern. to decide. As for the second starting prize, the extracted value is compared with the big hit judgment value set in the second special prize judgment table, and when the extracted value matches any one of the big hit judgment values, the second special pattern is given a big hit. to decide. Then, when the extracted value does not match any of the big hit determination values, the extracted value is compared with the small hit determination value set in the second special hit determination table, and the extracted value matches any of the small hit determination values. If they match, it is decided to make a small win with respect to the second special symbol. Determining to make a small win also means making a provisional decision to make a big win via a small win (because it is not controlled as a big win unless a V winning occurs during a small win, it is described as a temporary decision). .

Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to shift to the big win game state. It is also about deciding whether to do it or not. Determining whether or not to make a small win means determining whether or not to shift to a small winning game state. It is also about deciding whether or not.

8-4 (C), (D), and (E) are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. FIG. 8-4(C) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot. FIG. 8-4(D) is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot.

In the first special figure jackpot type determination table of FIG. 8-4 (C), the numerical value to be compared with the random 2 value for jackpot type determination, "symbol 15R short time jackpot" and "symbol 4R short time jackpot" A big hit determination value corresponding to each of the and is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 8-4(D), a jackpot determination value corresponding to the “symbol 15R time-saving jackpot”, which is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1, is set.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-4 (C) and (D), the big hit type determination value is also used as a judgment value (big hit design determination value) for determining the big hit design of the first special design and the second special design. be done. For example, the determination value corresponding to the "8R short-time jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "3". The determination value corresponding to the "15R time-saving big hit" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit symbol "7".

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of random 1 matches as the jackpot type, and the value of random 1 matches as the jackpot pattern. Determine the jackpot pattern. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

In the small hit via big hit type determination table of FIG. 8-4 (E), the numerical value to be compared with the random 2 value for judging the big hit type, "16 (15) R short time big hit via small hit" and " A big hit determination value corresponding to each of the 9 (8) R short-time big hit via a small hit and the 5 (4) R short-time big hit via a small hit is set. However, the jackpot types determined by the jackpot via jackpot type determination table are the first jackpot (16 (15) R time short jackpot) and the second jackpot (9 (8) R time short jackpot). , is a temporary jackpot type linked to each of the third jackpots (5 (4) R short-time jackpots), and is invalid if V winning does not occur in the jackpot game state.

8-5 and 8-6 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100. FIG. 8-5 and 8-6 show the relationship between the specific command data for the effect control command, the name of the command, and the specified contents of the command. In the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIGS. 8-5 and 8-6, various effect control commands are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 according to the game control state.

Main commands will be explained in FIGS. 8-5 and 8-6. The command 80XX(H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that designates a variation pattern to be variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols (each corresponding to the variation pattern XX). When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by that number. "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number. Moreover, the production control command specifying the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the command 80XX(H) is received, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect display device to start the effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols.

Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are display result specifying commands that indicate display results including loss display results, big hit types, big hit display results for each small hit type, and small hit display results.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the second special symbol. The command 8F00(H) is a symbol confirmation designation command for designating the end of the variation of the first and second special symbols.

Commands A001 to A005 (H) are hit start designation commands for designating the start of the jackpot gaming state for each jackpot type.

Command A1XX(H) is a special prize opening designation command indicating that the special prize opening is being opened for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX(H) is a post-opening big winning hole designation command indicating after opening (closing) the big winning hole for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

Commands A301 to A305 (H) are hit end designation commands for designating the end of the jackpot gaming state for each jackpot type.

Command A401 (H) is a first start prize designation command that designates that there has been a first start prize. Command A402 (H) is a second start prize designation command that designates that there has been a second start prize.

Command B000 (H) is a normal state designation command that designates that the game state is the normal state (low base state). Command B001 (H) is a first time saving state designation command that designates that the gaming state is the first time saving state (high base state). Command B002 (H) is a second time saving state designation command that designates that the gaming state is the second time saving state (high base state).

Command C0XX(H) is a first reserved storage number designation command that designates the first reserved storage number. "XX" in command C0XX(H) indicates the first reserved storage number. Command C1XX(H) is a second reserved storage quantity designation command for designating a second reserved storage quantity. "XX" in the command C0XX(H) indicates the second reserved storage number.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100, when subtracting the number of reserved memories, transmits a reserved memory number designation command that designates the number of reserved memories after subtraction, but not limited to this, For each of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count, a reserved memory count subtraction designation command may be used that designates subtraction of 1 from the reserved memory count.

Command C2XX (H) and command C3XX (H) are the contents of the judgment result at the time of winning such as jackpot judgment, jackpot type judgment, variation pattern type judgment at the time of start winning to the first start winning mouth or second start winning mouth It is a production control command shown. Among them, the command C2XX(H) is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not a big win will occur, whether or not a small win will occur, and the determination result of the type of the big win among the winning determination results. In addition, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command indicating the determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of the determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number value among the winning determination results is.

The command C401 (H) is a command designating the start of the first small hit. The command C402(H) is a command designating the start of the second small hit. The command C403 (H) is a command designating the start of the third small hit. The command C501 (H) is a command designating the end of the first small hit. The command C502(H) is a command to end the second small hit. The command C503 (H) is a command to end the third small hit. The command C601(H) is a V prize designation command that designates that there is a V prize. Command C602(H) is a V winning ball detection designation command that designates detection of winning balls (both V winning balls and winning balls other than V winning balls) to the V judgment winning device 87.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the RAM 102 is provided with a first pending storage buffer for storing the pending storage information of the first special symbol. In the first reserved storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the first reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured. In the first reservation storage buffer, a hardware random number for judging a jackpot (random R), a random number for judging a jackpot type (random 1) which is a software random number, a random number for judging a variation pattern type (random 2), and , a random number for determining a variation pattern (random 3) is stored.

As for the second special symbol, the RAM 102 is provided with a second reserved storage buffer for storing the reserved storage information of the second special symbol. In the second reserved storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured. In the second reservation storage buffer, a hardware random number for judging a jackpot (random R), a random number for judging a jackpot type (random 1) as a software random number, a random number for judging a variation pattern type (random 2), and , a random number for determining a variation pattern (random 3) is stored.

Based on the winning of the first start winning slot, the CPU 103 extracts random numbers from each of the random number circuit 124 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and stores them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Execute the process to (store). Specifically, these random values are extracted and saved (stored) in the first reserved storage buffer based on the winning of the first start winning slot. In addition, based on the winning of the second start winning slot, the CPU 103 extracts random numbers from the random number circuit 124 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and stores them in the storage area in the second reserve storage buffer. Executes the process of saving (storing) to Specifically, these random values are extracted and saved (stored) in the second reserve storage buffer based on the winning of the second start winning slot.

Such storage of information relating to starting winnings in the pending storage buffer may be referred to as "stored pending." In addition, the random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 2) and the random number for determining the variation pattern (random 3) are not extracted and stored in advance in the reservation storage buffer at the time of the start winning, but at the start of the variation of the special symbol. You may make it extract.

FIG. 8-7 is a flow chart showing the starting port switch passing process executed as part of the process of S101. In the starting port switch passage processing, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (S1211). If the first starting port switch 22A is not on, the process proceeds to S1221. If the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether the number of first reserved memories has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the number of first reserved memories for counting the number of first reserved memories). whether the value of the number counter is 4) (S1212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to S1221.

If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit, the CPU 103 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (S1213). Next, the CPU 103 extracts values from the random number circuit 124 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes processing for storing them in the save area in the first reserved storage buffer (S1214). In the process of S1214, the random number for judging the jackpot (random R), the random number for deciding the jackpot type (random 1), the random number for judging the fluctuation pattern type (random 2), and the random number for judging the fluctuation pattern (random 3) are extracted, Stored in the save area.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a prize-winning effect process for judging in advance the fluctuation display result and the fluctuation pattern type when the fluctuation based on the detected first special symbol starting prize is executed thereafter (S1215).

In this embodiment, after the starting winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening occurs, and various data obtained at the time of the starting winning opening are stored as reserved storage information, the start condition for the variable display is When established, at the timing of starting the variable display, in the special symbol normal process (S110), based on the reserved storage information, the variable display result for the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) to start the variable display is determined as a big hit display result and the big hit type is determined based on the big hit determination value and the big hit type determination value set corresponding to the various random numbers described above. Then, the determination of the variation pattern (including determination of the variation pattern type) in the variation pattern setting process (S111) is based on the variation pattern type determination value set corresponding to the various random values and the variation pattern determination value. based on

On the other hand, apart from such determination, the timing before the start of the variable display based on the starting winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, specifically, the game ball is the first starting winning opening Or at the timing when the second start winning opening is started (timing when the retention memory information is stored), the retention memory information storing various data obtained at the time of the start winning is read in advance, and based on the prefetched retention memory information Then, determination of whether or not a big win will occur, determination of whether or not a small win will occur, determination of the type of the big win, and determination of the type of variation pattern will be performed in advance according to the above-described various random numbers. Based on the determination value, the jackpot type determination value, and the variation pattern type determination value, a prize-winning effect process for prefetching determination is executed. By doing so, the performance control CPU 120 predicts the result of the variable display in advance before the variable display of the performance symbols is executed, and based on the various determination results at the time of starting winning, the variable display of the performance symbols. It is possible to execute a look-ahead performance such as a look-ahead announcement that gives a notice of a big win (possibility of a big win) during the game.

Then, the CPU 103 performs control for transmitting the symbol designation command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the performance processing at the time of winning (S1216), and performs control for transmitting the variation type command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1216). S1217). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first start winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (S1218), sets the value of the first reserved memory number counter to EXT data, and issues the first reserved memory number designation command. Control to transmit to the effect control CPU 120 is performed (S1219).

By executing the processing of S1216 and S1217, in this embodiment, the first Both the symbol designation command and the variation type command are surely transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 each time the start winning opening is started.

Further, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of S1216 to S1219, when the starting winning to the first starting winning opening occurs, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the first starting winning designation command and A set of four commands of the first reserved storage number designation command is transmitted collectively within one timer interrupt.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second starter switch 22B is on (S1221). If the second starter switch 22B is not on, the process is terminated. If the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the number of second reserved memories has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the number of second reserved memories for counting the number of second reserved memories). whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) (S1222). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process is terminated.

If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit, the CPU 103 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (S1223). Next, the CPU 103 extracts values from the random number circuit 124 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes processing for storing them in the save area in the second reserved storage buffer (S1224). In the process of S1224, a random number for jackpot determination (random R), a random number for jackpot type determination (random 1), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are extracted, Stored in the save area.

Next, the CPU 103 executes the same winning effect processing as the winning effect processing described in S1215 for the detected starting winning of the second special symbol (S1225). Then, the CPU 103 performs control for transmitting the symbol designation command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the performance processing at the time of winning (S1226), and performs control for transmitting the variation type command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1227). ). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the second start winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (S1228), sets the value of the second reserved memory number counter to EXT data, and issues the second reserved memory number designation command. Control to transmit to the effect control CPU 120 is performed (S1229).

By executing the processing of S1226 and S1227, in this embodiment, the second Each time a start winning opening is entered, both a symbol designation command and a variation type command are surely transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.例文帳に追加

Also, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of S1226 to S1229, when the start winning to the second start winning opening occurs, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the second start winning designation command and A set of four commands of the second reserved storage number designation command is transmitted collectively within one timer interrupt.

FIG. 8-8 is a flow chart showing a special symbol normal process (S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not there is reserved storage data in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer (S51). If there is no pending storage data in either the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer, the process ends.

If it is determined in S51 that there is no pending storage data in the pending storage buffer, a process (S80) for transmitting a customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the process is terminated. On the other hand, when there is reserved storage data in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer in S51, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not there is reserved storage data in the second reserved storage buffer (S52). If there is pending storage data in the second pending storage buffer, the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol) Data indicating "second" is set (S54). On the other hand, if there is no reserved storage data in the second reserved storage buffer, data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer (S53).

In this embodiment, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B are performed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. will be On the other hand, when the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, based on the reserved memory data stored in the second reserved memory buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. is done.

By the control of S52 to S54, if there is even one data of the second reserved storage in the second reserved storage buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol display device 4B based on the data of the second reserved storage, Priority is given to the variable display of the first special symbol display device 4A based on the data of the first reserved storage.

Next, in RAM 102, CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the saving area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of RAM 102 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=1 in the first reserved storage buffer is read out and stored in the random number buffer of RAM 102 . In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory buffer. It stores in the random number buffer of RAM102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and the number of storage areas in the first reserved storage buffer Shift content. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", 1 is subtracted from the count value of the second reserved storage number counter, and the contents of the save area in the second reserved storage buffer are erased.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103, in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102, saves the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) Each stored random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n−1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates the "second", stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM102 store each random value in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number is extracted always matches the order of the first reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It's like Also, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the second reserved memory numbers are extracted always matches the order of the second reserved memory number=1, 2, 3, 4. It's like

In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the reserved memory number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control CPU 120 based on the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after the subtraction (S59). ). In this case, when a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first reserved memory number designation command. Further, when a value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second reserved memory number designation command.

In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating "first" indicating that the process is performed for the first start winning opening, that is, "first" indicating that the process is performed for the first special symbol. or data indicating "second" indicating that the process is performed for the second start winning opening, i.e., data indicating "second" indicating that the process is performed for the second special symbol , is set to the special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processes in the special symbol process process, the process corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, it can be made common between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

Next, the CPU 103 reads a random R (random number for judging a big hit) from the random number buffer and executes a judging module (S61). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for judging a big hit extracted in S1214 of the starting switch passing process or S1224 of the starting switch passing process and stored in the holding memory buffer or the random number buffer, and judges the big hit. The big-hit determination module is a program that compares a predetermined big-hit determination value or small-hit determination value with a random number for big-hit determination, and executes a process of determining a big-hit or a small-hit when they match. That is, it is a program for executing the process of judging a big hit or the process of judging a small hit.

In the big hit determination process, if the first special symbol matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the second special symbol will be one of the big hits shown in FIG. 8-4 (B) If it matches the judgment value, it is decided to make a big hit with respect to the special symbol. If it is determined to be a big hit (Y of S61), the process proceeds to S71. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means to decide whether or not to shift to a big win game state, but it also means to decide whether or not to make the stop pattern on the special pattern display device a big win pattern. .

If it is determined to be a big win in S61 (Y of S61), a big win flag indicating a big win is set (S71).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol pointer indicates "first" (S72). When the special symbol pointer is "first", select the first special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 8-4 (C) (S73), and proceed to S75. On the other hand, if the special symbol pointer does not indicate "first" (if it indicates "second"), select the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 8-4 (D) (S74). , S75.

In S75, using the jackpot type determination table selected in S73 or S74, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area is determined as the jackpot type. Determine (S75) and proceed to S81.

Also, if the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values in S61 (N in S61), the data set in the special symbol pointer is data indicating "second". By confirming whether or not there is, it is confirmed whether or not the big hit determination target is the variable display of the second special symbol (S76). When the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is not the data indicating the "second" (the variable display of the first special symbol), the process proceeds to S82 which will be described later. On the other hand, when the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is data indicating "second" (variation display of the second special symbol), the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8-4 (B) By using the determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) coincides with any of the small hit determination values, thereby performing small hit determination processing (S77). That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIG. do. Then, when it is determined to be a small hit (S77Y), a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit is set (S78).

After setting the small hit flag, select the small hit via big hit type determination table of FIG. The jackpot type corresponding to the value that matches is determined as the jackpot via small hit type (S80). Then, the process proceeds to S81. On the other hand, if the value of the small hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the small hit determination values in S77 (N in S77), the process proceeds to S82, which will be described later.

In S81, data indicating the type of jackpot determined in S75 or S80 is stored in the jackpot type buffer in RAM 102 (S81), and the process proceeds to S82. For example, when the jackpot type is "symbol 15R time-saving jackpot", "01" is set in the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is "symbol 4R time-saving jackpot", data indicating the jackpot type. "02" is set in the jackpot type buffer as. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "16 (15) R short-time jackpot via small jackpot", "03" is set in a temporary jackpot type buffer different from the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is the small hit via 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot, "04" is set in the temporary jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is the small hit via 5 (4) R time-saving jackpot, "05" is set in the temporary jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. Among these, the data indicating the 16 (15) R short-time jackpot via the small hit, the 9 (8) R short-time jackpot via the small hit, and the 5 (4) R short-time jackpot via the small hit are the V prizes in the small hit game state. There is data that will be invalid without the occurrence of a big hit if a is not generated, and is provisionally set.

In S82, a special symbol stop symbol is set (S78). Specifically, when neither the big-hit flag nor the small-hit flag is set, "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the small hit flag is set, any one of "1", "5" and "9", which are the small hit patterns corresponding to the small hit type selected and determined in S80, is determined as the stop pattern of the special pattern. do. When the jackpot flag is set, either "3" or "7", which is a jackpot pattern corresponding to the jackpot type selected and determined in S75, is determined as the stop pattern of the special pattern. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S111) (S79).

FIG. 8-9 is a flow chart showing the small hit opening pre-processing (S118). In the small hit opening preprocessing, the CPU 103 operates the movable portion 872 in an open state by controlling the solenoid 22 based on the small hit opening mode, and starts the opening operation of the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 ( S411). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a small-hit start designation command indicating that the small-hit game state is started to the effect control CPU 120 (S412). Next, the CPU 103 sets a V judging winning number counter as counting means in order to use the number of winnings to the V winning area 870 in the open state of the small win as a termination condition of the open state (S413). Specifically, in S413, the counter value of the V judgment winning number counter is set to "10", and the setting for down-counting the V winning number is performed. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small winning opening process (S119) (S414).

FIG. 8-10 is a flow chart showing the small hit open process (S119) in the special symbol process process. In the small hit open process, the CPU 103 updates the small hit open control timer by subtracting -1 (S430). Next, in S435, which will be described later, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the V judgment prize winning number counter for counting the number of V winning prizes is "0" (S431). The V judgment winning ball number counter is set to "10" by S413 of FIG. 8-9, and when 10 V winning balls are counted, the count value becomes "0". When the count value of the V judgment winning number counter is "0" in S430, the process proceeds to S441. On the other hand, when the count value of the V judgment winning number counter is not "0" at S430, it is checked whether or not the small hit opening control timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S432).

When the small hit opening control timer has timed out in S432, the process proceeds to S441. On the other hand, when the small hit open control timer has not timed out in S432, the movable part 872 is opened by controlling the solenoid 22 corresponding to the time value of the small hit open control timer based on the open mode of the small hit. A process for opening and closing the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is performed (S433).

Next, in order to determine whether or not the V prize generated by the game ball entering from the V prize opening into the V prize area 870 which is in the open state inside the V judgment prize winning device 87 is detected, the V prize is detected. It is determined whether or not the switch 87a is on (S434). When it is on in S434, it means that V winning is detected, and the V winning flag which is set when V winning is detected is set (S435). Then, a process for transmitting a V winning ball detection designation command is performed (S436). As a result, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that the V winning balls have been detected, and can recognize the number of V winning balls. Next, the opening/closing member is operated by driving the solenoid to change the V winning opening of the V winning area 870 from the open state to the closed state (S437), and the process proceeds to S439. As a result, when the first game ball entering the V determination winning device 87 wins the V, the V winning opening of the V winning area 870 is closed, and then the game entering the V determination winning device 87 All the balls are guided to the winning ball area and detected by the V judgment winning switch 15a.

On the other hand, when it is not turned on in S434, it means that V winning is not detected, and it is determined whether or not the V determination winning switch 15a is turned on (S438). When it is on in S438, the process proceeds to S439, and when it is not on in S438, the process ends.

In S439, the count value of the V-judgment winning ball counter set to "10" by S413 of FIG. 8-9 is counted down to "-1" (S439), and a V-judgment winning ball detection designation command is transmitted. (S440). As a result, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that the V winning ball has entered the V judgment winning device 87 after the detection of the V winning ball, and enters the V judgment winning device 87. It is possible to recognize the number of game balls played.

When the count value of the V judgment winning prize number counter is "0" in S431, it means that the opening end condition of the small prize is satisfied because the number of V winning prizes of the small prize reaches the upper limit value, and When the small-hit open control timer times out in S432, it is when the small-hit opening end condition is established due to the end of the small-hit open control. At these times, the CPU 103 controls the solenoid 22 to operate the movable portion 872 in a closed state, thereby closing the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 (S441). When the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter becomes "0", even if the V-judgment winning device 87 is in the middle of opening according to the mode of opening the small win, the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter becomes ``0''. The V judgment winning device 87 is forcibly closed. When the small hit open control timer times out, the V judgment winning device 87 is closed according to the end of the small hit open control in the small hit open mode.

Next, the data corresponding to the specific period which is the V winning valid period after closing the V judgment winning device 87 is set in the V winning valid period timer (S442), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the small winning end process ( S120) is updated (S443), and the process ends. As a result, the timing of the specific period, which is the V winning valid period after the closing of the V judgment winning device 87, is started. By setting the specific period as the V winning valid period in this way, even if the game ball passes through the V winning area for some reason later than the normal passing time, the game ball can be detected. In addition, since a specific period is set, even if there is a person who illegally attempts to win a prize in the V winning area, it is only detected during that period, so fraud can be prevented.

FIG. 8-11 is a flow chart showing the small hit ending process (S120) in the special symbol process process. In the process after the end of the small hit, the CPU 103 updates the V winning valid period timer by subtracting -1 (S441), and confirms whether or not the V winning valid period timer has timed out (timer value=0) (S442).

When the V winning validity period timer has not timed out in S442, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag, which is set in S434 or S445 when the V winning is already detected, is set (S443). If the V winning flag is set, the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set, the V winning switch 87a is operated to determine whether or not the V winning caused by the game ball entering the V winning area 870 during the V winning valid period is detected. is turned on (S444). If it is not turned on in S444, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is ON in S444, it means that V winning is detected during the V winning valid period, and a V winning flag indicating that V winning has been detected is set (S445). Then, a process for transmitting a V winning designation command is performed (S446), and the process is terminated. Thereby, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that the V winning has occurred.

When the V winning valid period timer has timed out in S442, processing for transmitting a small hit end designation command is performed (S447). Thereby, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that the small hit has ended. Next, by changing the state of the solenoid 22, control is performed to open the opening/closing member and restore the V winning area 870 (V winning opening) to the open state (S447A). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set (S448). If the V winning flag is set in S448, it is determined that the game is a big win, and the big win flag is set (S449).

As described above, in the small winning game state, if the player hits to the right in accordance with the right-handed promotion notification, which will be described later, the game ball can enter the V judgment winning device 87 with a probability of approximately 100%, and the V judgment winning a prize. A game ball that has entered the device 87 always wins the V prize in the V prize area 870, so that the V prize flag is set with a probability of approximately 100% (S435 in FIG. 8-10). A jackpot flag is set and controlled to a jackpot game state.

Next, the CPU 103 stores the data indicating the jackpot type via the small win stored in the jackpot provisional type buffer in S81 in the jackpot type buffer in response to the fact that it is determined that the jackpot will be legally awarded due to the occurrence of the V prize. formally stored in (S450). Then, the time saving flag set at that time is once reset (S451).

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start 3 designation command, a jackpot start 4 designation command, or a jackpot start 5 designation command according to the jackpot type corresponding to the data stored in S450 (S452). Thereby, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that the jackpot game state starts. Next, a value corresponding to the big win display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of the big win on the image display device 5) is set in the big winning hole control timer (S453).

In addition, referring to the jackpot opening pattern data stored in the ROM 101, according to the jackpot type, the number of times of opening (eg, 15 times, 8 times, or 4 times), opening time (eg, 29 seconds), interval The opening pattern data indicating the opening mode such as the time (the closing time of the big winning opening between rounds) is set in a predetermined storage area formed in the RAM 102 (S454). Of these data, the number of times of opening is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of times of opening. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (S114) (S455), and the processing is terminated. As a result, when V winning occurs in the small winning game state, the state is shifted to the big winning game state.

If the V winning flag is not set in S448, the big win game state does not occur, so the data indicating the big win via the small win stored in the big win provisional type buffer in S81 is erased (S456), and the special symbol process flag is set. The value is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (S457), and the process is terminated. As a result, when the V prize does not occur in the small winning game state, the game does not shift to the big winning game state.

[Description of Characteristic Portion 05TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 05TM will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-1 to 9-83. In the present embodiment, during the variable display, a production that suggests that the expectation of the big hit of the variable display is high (story SP development production, etc.), and a production that informs that the display result of the variable display will be a big hit (first When the 1st to 3rd normal jackpot notification performances, etc.) are executed, a part of the performance sound is specially processed (scratched) and reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, during the jackpot game, a performance (first suspension consecutive performance) for informing that there is a suspended memory in which the display result is a "win" (a "big win" or a "minor win") in the suspended memory, or the big hit. When the jackpot type is the next confirmed jackpot (first confirmed performance) is executed, part of the performance sound is specially processed (scratched) and reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R. be done.

[Jackpot type table]
FIG. 9-1 is a diagram showing a jackpot type table. The jackpot type table shows, for each jackpot type, conditions for generating a jackpot, a control state (game state) after the jackpot, the number of opening times (number of rounds) in the jackpot, and the opening time of each round in the jackpot. In this embodiment, as the types of jackpots, a pattern 10R short-time big hit, a pattern 3R short-time big hit, a 10(9)R short-time jackpot via a small hit, and a 3(2)R short-time jackpot via a small hit are provided. The number in parentheses of the big win via the small win indicates the number of times the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is opened.

A small hit occurs when a game ball enters a second start winning hole provided in the variable winning ball device 6B and the display result of the second special symbol becomes a small winning symbol. Determination as to whether or not the display result of the special symbol is to be a small winning symbol is performed in advance by a random number lottery (small winning determination of the special symbol). When a small win occurs, a small win game state is entered, and the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened with an opening pattern of 10 opening times and 0.1 second opening time. The game control state (big hit probability, small hit probability, base) after the end of the small hit game state is the same as before the small hit. In the small win, a prize ball is paid out to the game ball that has won the V prize area 870 in the V judgment prize winning device 87 during the small win game state. During the small winning game state, it is set that about 10 winning balls can be generated, and it is set that prize balls can be paid out according to the winning balls.

While the operating port of the V determination winning device 87 (hereinafter referred to as “V winning port” as appropriate) is open, the game ball is entered into the operating port, and the game ball enters the V winning region 870 inside the V determination winning device 87. (V winning), a big hit occurs. A big win via such a small win is called a big win via a small win. The jackpot via small hits includes "10 (9) R time-saving jackpot via small hits" and "3 (2) R short-time jackpot via small hits".

On the other hand, a big hit that is generated directly by a variable display of special symbols without going through a small win is called a big hit in design. As the symbol jackpot, there are a "symbol 3R time-saving big hit" and a "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" which are generated directly based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this way, the big wins are the symbol big win directly generated based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the V winning via the small winning based on the variable display of the second special symbol. It includes a big hit via a small hit.

The advantageous state advantageous to the player in this embodiment also includes the opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 . Hereinafter, “symbol 3R time-saving jackpot” and “small hit via 3 (2) time-saving jackpot” are appropriately referred to as “3R jackpot”, and “symbol 10R time-saving jackpot” and “small hit via 10 (9) time-saving jackpot” are referred to as “3R jackpot”. It is appropriately called "10R jackpot".

"Symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which the big prize opening is opened 10 times (10R). In addition, the 10 (9) R time-saving jackpot via a small hit is a large winning opening 9 times (9R) after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), with the condition of V winning. It is a big win to be opened, and although the number of times of opening the big winning hole is 9 times, since the winning device is substantially opened for 10 rounds, the player can say "symbol 10R short time jackpot" for opening the big winning hole. I feel that it is the same jackpot type.

"Symbol 3R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which the big prize opening is opened three times (3R). In addition, the 3 (2) R time-saving jackpot via a small hit is a big winning opening twice (2R) after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds × 10 times) on the condition of V winning. It is a big win to be opened, and the number of times the big winning hole is opened is two times, but since the winning device is substantially opened for three rounds, the player can say "symbol 3R time-saving big win" regarding the opening of the big winning hole. I feel that it is the same jackpot type.

The time-saving state after the "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot" is the end condition that the number of fluctuation display times of the second special pattern is 1 time, and the total number of fluctuation display times of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is 5 times. Two end states are set with a condition (not shown). Such a number of time-saving end conditions that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is 1 time is considered that the game ball entering the V judgment winning device 87 enters the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. is set as In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the termination condition that the number of fluctuation display times of the second special symbol is 1 time, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed, at a rate of about 1/7, there is a possibility of generating a big hit via a small hit. is a certain number of times.

The number of times of the time-saving end condition that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is once is set for the following reasons. In the case of "symbol 3R time saving jackpot", the time saving state (including electric support state) is basically continued until the second special symbol variation display is completed once. , it is necessary to make the game ball enter the passage gate 41 by hitting to the right to open the variable winning ball device 6B, and to make the game ball win the variable winning ball device 6B in that state, such a variable winning It may take a long time until the ball device 6B wins the game ball, and the first special symbol that has been retained and stored may be variably displayed first.

Therefore, the end condition that the total number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is five times is a big hit immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the fluctuation display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. Even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started by the reserved memory based on the first start prize which can be stored up to four before the game state, one of the second special symbols which is likely to be determined as a big win advantageous to the player. This is a condition for ensuring that the variable display for batches can be executed. By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol by the reserved memory based on the first start winning is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, so that in the time saving state, it is likely to be determined to be an advantageous big hit for the player. It is possible to prevent the fluctuation display of the second special symbol from being stopped.

In addition, after the big hit with the “symbol 10R time-saving big hit” and part of the “10 (9) R time-saving big hit via small hit”, the end condition is that the number of times the second special symbol is changed is 99 times, and the first special Two end states are set, namely, the end condition (not shown) that the total number of fluctuation display times of the symbol and the second special symbol is 103 times. Such a number of times of 99 times of the end condition of the time saving state is set considering that the game ball entering the V judgment winning device 87 enters the V winning region 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is 99 times is a state in which the big hit via the next small win is substantially determined when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. , Compared to the "symbol 3R short time big hit", the number of times that the possibility of generating a big hit via a small hit is greatly increased. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the occurrence of the big win via the small win, and the player's expectation for the occurrence of the big win via the small win can be enhanced.

In addition, the end condition that the total number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 103 times is the same reason as in the case of "symbol 3R time saving big hit", immediately after the start of the time saving state, the second Even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started by the reserved memory based on the first start winning prize of which maximum four can be stored before the jackpot game state is established before the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is established, the player starts. This is to make it possible to surely execute the variation display of the number of variations for 99 times of the second special symbol which is likely to be determined as a big win advantageous to the player.

In addition, after the big hit of the 10 (9) R time reduction jackpot via the small hit and the 3 (2) R time reduction jackpot via the small hit, the end condition is that the number of times the second special symbol is changed is 7 times. Two end states are set, namely, the end condition (not shown) that the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 times. Such a number of 7 times of the end condition of the time-saving state is set in consideration of the fact that game balls entering the V judgment winning device 87 enter the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is 7 times is substantially the next small hit when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, compared to the "symbol 3R time-saving big hit". Although the big hit is not confirmed, it is the number of times that the possibility of generating a big hit via a small hit is greatly increased. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the occurrence of the big win via the small win, and the player's expectation for the occurrence of the big win via the small win can be enhanced.

In addition, the end condition that the total number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 times is the second special symbol immediately after the start of the time saving state for the same reason as in the case of the symbol 3R time saving jackpot. Even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started by the reserved memory based on the first start winning, which can be stored up to four before the jackpot game state, before the condition for starting the variable display is established, it is advantageous for the player. This is to make it possible to surely execute the variation display of the number of variations for seven times of the second special symbol which is likely to be determined as a big hit.

[Random value]
FIG. 9-2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 9-2, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number for variation pattern determination Numerical data indicating each of MR3, random number MR4 for judging the result of normal map display, and random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable.

It should be noted that random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values within the range shown in FIG. 9B, but the present invention is not limited to this. ~ MR5, values in other ranges may be used.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and variable display of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns, etc. are stored.

[Display result determination table]
FIGS. 9-3 (A1) and (A2) are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table for the first special symbol and the display result determination table for the second special symbol. These tables are stored in the ROM 101. FIG.

FIG. 9-3 (A1) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table for the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "[first special symbol] display result determination table"). [For the first special symbol] The display result determination table is a data table for judging a big hit with respect to the first special symbol, and is a table in which a big hit determination value (not shown) to be compared with the random number MR1 is set. is. "Probability" shown in FIG. 9-3 (A1) indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a big hit. In this example, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol is 1/199.

FIG. 9-3 (A2) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table for the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "[second special symbol] display result determination table"). [For the second special symbol] The display result determination table is a data table for judging a big hit and a small hit for the second special symbol, and is a big hit judgment value compared with the random number MR1 and a small hit judgment. It is a table in which values (not shown) are set. In FIG. 9-3 (A2), the upper stage is the big hit determination table portion, and the lower stage is the small hit determination table portion. The "probability" shown in the upper row indicates the probability (ratio) of winning a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the lower row indicates the probability (ratio) of winning a small hit.

In this example, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol is 1/199. Also, the small hit probability of the second special symbol is set to 1/7.35. In addition, you may provide a small hit in the 1st special design. In such a case, it is desirable that the probability of winning a small hit is lower for the first special symbol than for the second special symbol. For example, the small hit probability by the first special symbol may be set to 1/99.

When the CPU 103 detects the starting winning to the first starting winning opening (first starting winning) or the starting winning to the second starting winning opening (second starting winning), the random number circuit 104 is activated at a predetermined timing. to extract the count value (random value MR1). For the first start winning prize, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot judgment value set in the [first special symbol] display result judgment table, and when the extracted value matches one of the jackpot judgment values, regarding the first special symbol Decide to hit the jackpot. For the second start winning, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot judgment value set in the [for the second special symbol] display result judgment table, and when the extracted value matches one of the jackpot judgment values, regarding the second special symbol Decide to hit the jackpot. Then, when the extracted value does not match any of the big hit judgment values, the extracted value is compared with the small hit judgment value set in the [for the second special symbol] display result judgment table, and the extracted value is any small If it matches the hit determination value, it is decided to make a small hit with respect to the second special symbol. Determining to make a small win also means making a provisional decision to make a big win via a small win (because it is not controlled as a big win unless a V winning occurs during a small win, it is described as a temporary decision). .

Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to shift to the big win game state. It is also about deciding whether to do it or not. Determining whether or not to make a small win means determining whether or not to shift to a small winning game state. It is also about deciding whether or not.

[Jackpot type determination table]
9-3 (B1), (B2-1), and (B2-2) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. FIG. 9-3 (B1) is a jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol used for determining the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot. FIG. 9-3 (B2-1) is a jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol used for determining the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot. FIG. 9-3 (B2-2) is a small hit via big hit type determination table for the second special symbol used to determine the big hit type of the small hit via big hit when it is determined to be a small hit by the second special symbol. is.

The jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol in FIG. 9-3 (B1) (hereinafter referred to as “[first special symbol] jackpot type determination table. A big hit determination value is set which is a numerical value to be compared with the value and corresponds to each of the "symbol 10R short time big hit" and the "symbol 3R short time big hit".

In addition, FIG. 9-3 (B1) also shows the number of times of the time saving control executed after the big hits corresponding to the "symbol 10R time saving big hit" and the "symbol 3R time saving big hit". The "symbol 10R time saving big hit" has 99 times of time saving control, and the "symbol 3R time saving big hit" has one time saving control number.

In this embodiment, the number of times of time-saving control is 99 times. The "pattern 10R time-saving big hit" and "10 (9) time-saving big hit via small hit", which are 1 time or 7 times, are appropriately called "10R big hit B" (next non-determined big hit), and the number of times of time saving control is 1 time or 7 times. "symbol 3R time-saving big hit" and "3 (2) time-saving big hit via small hit" are appropriately referred to as "3R big hit B" (next undetermined big hit). Hereinafter, the "jackpot" in which the number of times of time saving control is X times is appropriately referred to as the "jackpot" (X times).

In this example, in the [first special symbol] jackpot type determination table, 0 to 2 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the "symbol 10R short time jackpot" (99 times) ( 1%), and 3 to 299 are assigned to the “symbol 3R time-saving jackpot” (once) (99%).

The jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol in FIG. 9-3 (B2-1) (hereinafter referred to as "[second special symbol] jackpot type determination table.)" It is a numerical value to be compared with the value of MR2, and a big hit determination value corresponding to each of "symbol 10R short time big win" and "symbol 3R short time big win" is set.

In addition, FIG. 9-3 (B2-1) also shows the number of times of the time saving control executed after the big hits corresponding to the "symbol 10R time saving big hit" and "symbol 3R time saving big hit". The "symbol 10R time saving big hit" has a time saving control frequency of 99 or 7 times, and the "symbol 3R time saving big hit" has a time saving control frequency of 7 times.

In this example, in the [second special symbol] jackpot type determination table, 0 to 29 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the "symbol 10R short time jackpot" (99 times) ( 10%), 30 to 149 are assigned to "symbol 10R time saving jackpot" (7 times) (40%), and 150 to 299 are assigned to "symbol 3R time saving jackpot" (7 times) ( 50%).

9-3 (B2-2) for the second special symbol via a small hit type determination table (hereinafter referred to as "[for the second special symbol] small hit via a big hit type determination table.) A numerical value to be compared with the value of the random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot via a hit, and for each of "10 (9) R short-time jackpot via a small hit" and "3 (2) R short-time jackpot via a small hit". A corresponding jackpot judgment value is set.

In addition, in FIG. 9-3 (B2-2), it is executed after the big hit corresponding to each of "10 (9) R short time big hit via small hit" and "3 (2) R short time big hit via small hit" The number of times of time reduction control is also shown. The number of times of time reduction control is 99 times or 7 times for "10 (9) R time reduction big hit via small hit", and the number of times of time reduction control is 7 times for "3 (2) R time reduction big hit via small hit".

In this example, [for the second special symbol] in the jackpot type determination table via small hit, 0 to 29 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are "10 (9) R time short jackpot via small hit" ( 99 times) (10%), 30 to 149 are assigned to "10 (9) R time-saving big hits via small hits" (7 times) (40%), and 150 to 299 are " It is assigned to 3 (2) R time-saving big hits via small hits” (7 times) (50%).

[Variation pattern judgment]
The ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from among the plurality of types described above in accordance with the predetermined result. Determine the variation pattern.

Here, the variation pattern determination when the production mode is the normal mode and when the production mode is the powerful RUSH mode will be described (see FIGS. 9-12 for details of the production mode). Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the [loss] variation pattern determination table used when it is decided in advance that the variation display result will be "loss", and the variation display result as a "big hit" ( A [big hit] variation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined to make a small win) is prepared in advance.

<Normal mode fluctuation pattern>
In the [for loss] variation pattern determination table when the production mode is normal mode, the variation pattern of "non-reach loss", the variation pattern of "normal reach loss", the variation pattern of "SP-A loss", the "SP- A predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of "B failure" and the variation pattern of "SP-C failure".

[For jackpot] In the fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach jackpot", the fluctuation pattern of "SP-A1 jackpot", the fluctuation pattern of "SP-A2 jackpot", the fluctuation pattern of "SP-B1 jackpot", " A predetermined random value within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the variation pattern of "SP-B2 big win", the variation pattern of "SP-C1 big win", and the variation pattern of "SP-C2 big win". is assigned as the judgment value.

<Non-reach loss>
In the present embodiment, among the variation patterns in which the final display result is "loss", the "non-reach failure" variation pattern does not establish the reach state and informs that the final display result is "loss".

<No normal reach>
In this embodiment, in the variation pattern of "normal reach lost" among the variation patterns in which the final display result is "missed", after the reach state is established, at a predetermined trigger (operation of push button 31B, elapse of a predetermined period, etc.) By displaying a combination of decorative symbols (for example, "323", "545", etc.) corresponding to the display result of "loss", it is notified that the final display result is "loss".

<Normal Reach Jackpot>
In this embodiment, among the variation patterns in which the final display result is a "big hit", in the variation pattern of "normal reach big hit", after the reach state is established, at a predetermined opportunity (operation of the push button 31B, elapse of a predetermined period, etc.) By displaying a combination of decorative symbols (for example, "222", "777", etc.) corresponding to the display result of "big win", the final display result is "big win" or "small win". be notified.

In this embodiment, a plurality of types of characters appear in various effects. In this example, an ally character A, an ally character B, an ally character C, an enemy character X, and an enemy character Y are provided as these characters. In the following, friendly character A will be referred to as "friendly character A", "friendly A", "character A", "character A", "friendly character (A)", "friendly (A)", and "character (A)" as appropriate. ” and “Character (A)”. Also, hereinafter, ally character B will be referred to as "ally character B", "ally B", "character B", "character B", "ally character (B)", "ally (B)", "character ( B)” and “Character (B)”. In the following, friendly character C will be referred to as "friendly character C", "friendly C", "character C", "character C", "friendly character (C)", "friendly (C)", and "character (C)" as appropriate. ” and “Character (C)”. In the following, the enemy character X will be referred to as "enemy character X", "enemy X", "character X", "character X", "enemy character (X)", "enemy (X)", "character ( X)” and “Character (X)”. Also, hereinafter, the enemy character Y is appropriately referred to as "enemy character Y", "enemy Y", "character Y", "character Y", "enemy character (Y)", "enemy (Y)", "character ( Y)” and “Character (Y)”.

<Loss with super reach/jackpot>
In this embodiment, variation patterns with super reach ("SP-A miss", "SP-B miss", "SP-C miss", "SP-A1 big hit", "SP-A2 big hit", "SP- B1 jackpot", "SP-B2 jackpot", "SP-C1 jackpot", "SP-C2 jackpot"), a super reach effect (hereinafter referred to as "SP reach The final display result is confirmed and stopped by the execution of the effect.

(Challenge SP production)
In the present embodiment, in the fluctuation patterns of "SP-A lost", "SP-A1 big hit", and "SP-A2 big hit" among the fluctuation patterns with super reach, the fluctuation display result is "missed" after the reach state is established. ” is displayed temporarily (temporary failure notification), and then develops into Super Reach, and whether friendly character B wins the jackpot by performing the challenge of destroying the rock. (Hereinafter referred to as “Challenge SP effect” and “Challenge SP” as appropriate.) is executed (in this example, “Nana Challenge”, see FIG. 9-27 (3)). Hereinafter, such a variation pattern will be referred to as “variation pattern with “SP-A””, “variation pattern with challenge SP”, etc. as appropriate.

Here, when the variation pattern is "SP-A lost", an effect (failure effect) in which ally character B fails the challenge is executed, and it is notified that the final display result is "missed". On the other hand, when the variation pattern is "SP-A1 big hit", an effect (success effect) in which ally character B succeeds in the challenge is executed (see FIGS. 9-32 and 9-33), and the final display result is It is reported that it will be a "big hit". Further, when the variation pattern is "SP-A2 big hit", after the failure effect is executed in the challenge SP effect, the later-described revival effect is executed, and it is informed that the final display result is "big hit". be.

(Battle SP production)
In this embodiment, in the variation patterns of "SP-B miss", "SP-B1 big hit", and "SP-B2 big hit" among the variation patterns with super reach, after the reach state is established, it develops into super reach. , Super reach effect (hereinafter referred to as "battle SP effect" or "battle SP" as appropriate) is executed to inform whether or not a "jackpot" is won by a battle between ally character A and enemy character X. (See FIG. 9-27 (6)).

Here, when the variation pattern is "SP-B lost", an effect (defeat effect) in which friendly character A is defeated by enemy character X is executed, and it is notified that the final display result is "missed". be. On the other hand, when the variation pattern is "SP-B1 big hit", an effect (victory effect) in which friendly character A wins against enemy character X is executed (see FIGS. 9-34 to 9-37), and the final display is performed. It is reported that the result will be a "jackpot". Further, when the variation pattern is "SP-B2 big hit", after the defeat effect is executed in the battle SP effect, the resurrection effect, which will be described later, is executed, and it is informed that the final display result is "big hit". be. Hereinafter, such a variation pattern will be referred to as "variation pattern with 'SP-B'", "variation pattern with battle SP", etc. as appropriate.

(Story SP direction)
In the present embodiment, in the variation patterns of "SP-C loss", "SP-C1 big hit", and "SP-C2 big hit" among the variation patterns with super reach, after the reach state is established, it develops into super reach , Super Reach production (hereinafter referred to as "story SP production" and "story SP" as appropriate) for notifying whether or not the player has won the "jackpot" by displaying a story video related to ally character A. is executed (see FIG. 9-27 (8)).

Here, when the variation pattern is "SP-C lost", an effect (uncompleted effect) is executed in which the display of the story video related to ally character A ends halfway, and the final display result is "missed". ” is reported. On the other hand, when the variation pattern is "SP-C1 big hit", an effect (achievement effect) is executed in which the story image related to the ally character A is displayed to the end (Figs. 9-38 to 9-41). ), and it is notified that the final display result will be a "jackpot". Further, when the variation pattern is "SP-C2 big hit", after the non-achievement effect is executed in the story SP effect, the resurrection effect, which will be described later, is executed, and it is notified that the final display result is "big win". be done. Hereinafter, such a variation pattern will be referred to as "variation pattern with 'SP-C'", "variation pattern with story SP", etc. as appropriate.

FIG. 9-4 is a variation pattern determination table in normal mode. As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), in the [for loss] variation pattern determination table in normal mode, 1 to 900 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are "non-reach loss", 901 to 950 is "Normal reach out", 951 to 970 is "SP-A out", 971 to 990 is "SP-B out", 991 to 997 is "SP-C out", each variation pattern assigned to.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), in the [for big hit] variation pattern determination table in normal mode, 1 to 50 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are "normal reach big hit" , 51 to 185 is "SP-A1 big hit", 186 to 200 is "SP-A2 big hit", 201 to 470 is "SP-B1 big hit", 471 to 500 is "SP-B2 big hit", 501 950 to 950 are assigned to the "SP-C1 big hit", and 951 to 997 are assigned to the "SP-C2 big hit".

As shown in FIG. 9-4, when the display result is "missing", among the variation patterns with super reach, the variation pattern with "SP-A" (in this example, "SP-A is missing" ) is selected is (970-951+1) / 997 = about 2%, and the variation pattern with "SP-B" (in this example, "SP-B deviation") is selected. (990-971+1)/997=about 2%, and the rate at which the variation pattern with "SP-C" (in this example, "SP-C deviation") is selected is (997-991+1)/997= about 0.7%.

On the other hand, when the display result is "big hit", among the variation patterns with super reach, the variation pattern with "SP-A" (in this example, "SP-A1 big hit", "SP-A2 big hit" ) is selected is {(185-51+1)+(200-186+1)}/997=about 15%, and the variation pattern with “SP-B” (in this example, “SP-B1 jackpot” , “SP-B2 jackpot”) is selected is {(470-201+1)+(500-471+1)}/997=about 30%, and the variation pattern with “SP-C” (in this example , “SP-C1 jackpot”, “SP-C2 jackpot”) is selected is {(950−501+1)+(997−951+1)}/997=about 50%.

In this way, when the display result is "missing", among the fluctuation patterns with super reach, the fluctuation pattern with "SP-C" (about 0.7%) < fluctuation pattern with "SP-B" (approximately 2%)=variation pattern (approximately 2%) with "SP-A". In addition, when the display result is "big hit", among the variation patterns with super reach, the variation pattern with "SP-A" (about 15%) < the variation pattern with "SP-B" (about 30% )<variation pattern with “SP-C” (approximately 50%).

That is, when variation patterns with various super reach are executed, the ratio of "loss": "jackpot" (jackpot occurrence rate = jackpot / (loss + jackpot)) is the same as the variation pattern with "SP-A" If executed, 2(%):15(%)=1:7.5 ratio (88%), and if the variation pattern with "SP-B" is executed, 2(%):30 (%) = 1:15 ratio (93%) and 0.7 (%): 50 (%) = 1:70 (98%) if the variation pattern with "SP-C" is performed is the ratio of

Therefore, when variation patterns with various super reach are executed, the relationship of variation pattern with "SP-A" < variation pattern with "SP-B" < variation pattern with "SP-C" hits the jackpot Incidence is high. That is, the degree of expectation for a big hit is high in the relationship of variation pattern with battle SP<variation pattern with challenge SP<variation pattern with story SP.

<Variation pattern of powerful RUSH mode>
In the [for loss] variation pattern determination table when the production mode is powerful RUSH mode, the variation pattern of "non-reach loss", the variation pattern of "normal reach loss", the variation pattern of "SP-X loss", the "SP A predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of "-Y out of range".

[For jackpot] In the variation pattern determination table, random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern for the variation pattern of "normal reach jackpot", the variation pattern of "SP-X jackpot", and the variation pattern of "SP-Y jackpot" A predetermined random value within the range that can be taken is assigned as a judgment value.

The variation pattern of "non-reach loss", the variation pattern of "normal reach loss", and the variation pattern of "normal reach jackpot" are the same as those described in the normal mode variation pattern, so the description is omitted here.

<Loss with super reach/jackpot>
In the present embodiment, in the variation pattern with super reach ("SP-X lost", "SP-Y lost", "SP-X big hit", "SP-Y big hit"), whether "big hit" is won The final display result is fixed and stopped by executing the super ready-to-win effect for notifying whether or not. The variation pattern of "SP-Y loss" and the variation pattern of "SP-Y big hit" are the same as the variation pattern of "SP-B loss" and "SP-B1 big hit" described above. Description is omitted here.

(Annihilation SP production)
In the present embodiment, in the variation patterns of "SP-X lost" and "SP-X big hit" among the variation patterns with super reach, the variation display result becomes "loss" after the reach state is established. The combination of symbols is temporarily displayed temporarily (provisional failure notification), then developed into super reach, and attacked to annihilate a group of enemy characters Y (hereinafter referred to as "enemy character Y group" as appropriate). , a super ready-to-win effect (hereinafter referred to as "annihilation SP effect") for informing whether or not a "jackpot" is won is executed (see FIG. 9-68).

Here, if the variation pattern is "SP-X lost", an effect (residual effect) in which the enemy character group Y remains is executed (see FIG. 9-68 (3A)), and the final display result is "missed". ” is reported. On the other hand, when the variation pattern is "SP-X big hit", an effect of annihilating enemy character Y (annihilation effect) is executed (see FIG. 9-68 (3B)), and the final display result is "big hit". will be notified.

FIG. 9-5 is a variation pattern determination table in powerful RUSH mode. As shown in Figure 9-5 (A), in the powerful RUSH mode [for loss] variation pattern judgment table, 1 to 950 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are "non-reach out" , 951 to 980 are "normal reach failure", 981 to 985 are "SP-X failure", and 986 to 997 are "SP-Y failure".

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (B), in the powerful RUSH mode [for jackpot] variation pattern determination table, 1 to 500 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are "normal reach jackpot , 501 to 600 are "SP-X big hits", and 601 to 997 are "SP-Y big hits".

[Scratch processing for sound effects]
In this embodiment, the speakers 8L and 8R are capable of reproducing and outputting effects sounds (music, speech sounds, sound effects, error notification sounds, etc.). In this embodiment, it is possible to execute special processing (referred to as “scratch processing” in this example) on part of the effect sound and reproduce and output it. Scratching is a special sound (hereinafter referred to as "scratch sound") produced by forcibly moving the analog record by hand while playing it on the turntable to drastically change the playback speed. It is the technique of creating. Scratch processing does not use analog records, but uses sound data (for example, waveform data such as Wave files) in the storage section of the audio control board to create the same effect sounds as scratch sounds in analog records. This is a pseudo process. Hereinafter, scratch processing is appropriately referred to as “scratch processing”.

In the present embodiment, the scratch processing is performed by continuously reproducing and outputting the same sound data (hereinafter referred to as "scratch sound data" as appropriate) at short intervals, thereby artificially generating a dramatic sound similar to the scratch sound. Let

Scratch sound data is sound data containing one or more sounds (speech sounds, sound effects, music sounds, etc.), and the initial sounds (one or more sounds) of words related to various effects that appear in this game machine. It is sound data composed of In this embodiment, the scratch sound data is sound data including one sound (sound of dialogue, sound effect, music sound, etc.), and is the first letter of a word related to various effects appearing in the game machine. It is sound data composed of eyes.

For example, it is possible to perform the scratch processing on the sound data corresponding to the initial letter (first sound) of the word "V (V) stock" related to the V stock effect, which will be described later. In addition, the sound data corresponding to the initial letter (first note) of the word "welcome" in the lyrics related to the song X among the songs reproduced and output during the jackpot game to be described later is scratched. Processing can be performed.

In this embodiment, scratch processing is not performed on the sound data of a word in which the same sound (second and subsequent sounds) as the initial sound (first sound) of the word is repeated multiple times or more. For example, scratch processing is not performed on the sound data corresponding to the initial letter (the first sound) of the word "big hit (oh hit)". When the sound data corresponding to the initial letter (single sound) of the word "oh-atari" is scratched, the first sound "o" is scratch-processed and reproduced. This is to prevent the player from being confused as to whether the second syllable "O" is being reproduced or output.

It should be noted that the scratching process may be performed on a word in which the same sound (second and subsequent sounds) as the initial sound (first sound) of the word is repeated multiple times or more, without being limited to the above embodiment. For example, scratch processing is performed on the sound data corresponding to the first letter "o" of the word "big hit", and after reproducing and outputting "o" four times in succession, The second sound "o" may be reproduced and output.

In this embodiment, the sound effect (sound data) is composed of a first sound effect (first sound data) and a second sound effect (second sound data) that is reproduced and output after the first sound effect. may occur. In this embodiment, the number of sounds included in the first sound effect is less than the number of sounds included in the second sound effect. For example, the sound data corresponding to the word "V (buoy) stock" consists of the first sound data corresponding to the initial letter "bu" (one sound) and the second and subsequent letters "i stock" (four sounds). and second sound data corresponding to . In this case, it is possible to reproduce and output the second effect sound "Istock" without executing the scratch process after executing the scratch process for the first sound effect "Bu" and reproducing it. be.

In this embodiment, in the scratch processing, the number of consecutive times of the same sound data (scratch sound data) is set to 2 or more. For example, in the scratch process, depending on which effect is executed, the number of consecutive scratch sound data may be set to two or four.

In this embodiment, the scratch sound data may be reproduced and output at any interval. For example, when the scratch sound data is reproduced four times in succession (that is, when there are three reproduction output intervals), the scratch sound data may be reproduced three times at 0-second intervals, or It may be reproduced at intervals of 1 second, the first time at 1 second intervals, the second time at 2 second intervals, the third time at 3 second intervals, the first time at 3 second intervals, and the second time at 2 second intervals. It may be played back at intervals of seconds, and the third time at intervals of 1 second. Hereinafter, the reproduction output interval of the scratch sound data will be referred to as "scratch interval".

In this way, by continuously reproducing and outputting the scratch sound data at short intervals, it is possible to give the player an effect (refrain effect) that leaves the impression and memory of the effect sound in which the scratch processing was executed (refrain effect). can improve the performance effect. In addition, the refrain effect is improved as the number of consecutive scratch sound data increases.

Note that the sound data on which the scratch process is executed is not limited to the above embodiment, and may be sound data composed of two or more sounds. For example, after performing the scratch processing on the sound data corresponding to the "buoy" of (the first and second notes) of the "V (buoy) stock" and reproducing and outputting it, the "stock" is scratched. Reproduction output may be performed without executing the processing.

[Example of playback output of scratch-processed effect sound]
FIG. 9-6(A) is a specific example of the effect sound type table in this embodiment. The sound effect type table is a storage area for reproducing sound data, and is provided in a storage unit included in the audio control board.

As shown in FIG. 9-6(A), the effect sound corresponding to the word "powerful" is stored as the effect sound type. It is composed of a sound and a second effect sound corresponding to the second and subsequent characters "Waffle".

FIG. 9-6(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a reproduction output example when the effect sound is reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R in this embodiment.

FIG. 9-6 (B1) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of reproduction output when effect sounds for which scratch processing is not executed in this embodiment are reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (B1), the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the effect sound "powerful" from the speakers 8L and 8R without executing the scratch process. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the first effect sound "Pa" from the speakers 8L and 8R without executing the scratch process, and reproduces and outputs the second effect sound "Waffle" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

FIG. 9-6 (B2) is an explanatory diagram showing a reproduction output example when the effect sound subjected to the scratch processing in this embodiment is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (B2), the effect control CPU 120 executes scratch processing and reproduces and outputs the effect sound "powerful" from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the scratch processing to reproduce and output the first effect sound “pa” from the speakers 8L and 8R four times in succession, and the first effect sound and the second effect sound “powerful” are output to the speakers. Reproduce and output from 8L and 8R.

Further, when the effect sound is scratch-processed and reproduced, other effect devices may perform effects in conjunction with each other. For example, when the scratch processing is executed and the first effect sound "Pa" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R four times in succession, the game effect lamp 9 emits light (blinks) in accordance with the reproduction output timing of the first effect sound. ). Further, when the scratch processing is executed and the first effect sound "pa" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R four times in a row, the light guide plate provided in the image display device 5 is set to the reproduction output timing of the first effect sound. You may light-emit (blink) according to . Further, when the scratch processing is executed and the first effect sound "Pa" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R four times in succession, the stick controller 31A may be vibrated in accordance with the reproduction output timing of the first effect sound. good.

[Sound impact]
In the present embodiment, the "impact of sound" is the momentum at the start of the reproduction output of the sound (hereinafter referred to as "beginning" and "rising" as appropriate). Below, it is called "impact" appropriately. FIGS. 9-7 (1) to (3) show graphs in which the horizontal axis is time and the vertical axis is output volume (%).

As shown in FIG. 9-7(1), the portion from the minimum value (0%) to the maximum value (100%) of the voice output volume is the impact. Hereinafter, the difference between the maximum value and the minimum value of the audio output volume will be referred to as an "output absolute value" as appropriate. Also, the period from the minimum value (0%) to the maximum value (100%) of the voice output volume is referred to as "impact time", and in this example, the impact time is the period from t0 to t1.

<Strength of sound impact>
In this embodiment, the impact is
IM = output absolute value / impact time (Equation 1)
Based on the IM value (hereinafter referred to as “impact value” as appropriate) calculated by the following formula, it is possible to determine the strength of the impact. The larger the impact value, the stronger the impact, and the smaller the impact value, the weaker the impact. That is, the impact value is the same as the slope of the graph shown in FIG. 9-7.

As shown in Equation (1), the larger the output absolute value, the larger the impact value, and the smaller the output absolute value, the smaller the impact value (not shown). For example, when the value of impact time is constant, output absolute value: maximum value (100%) - minimum value (0%) = 100, output absolute value: maximum value (50%) - minimum value ( 0%)=50, the impact value is larger.

Also, as shown in formula (1), the smaller the impact time value, the larger the impact value (see FIG. 9-7 (2A)). becomes smaller (see FIG. 9-7 (2B)). For example, when the output absolute value is constant, impact time: tb (1) - t0 (0) = 1 is better than impact time: ta (10) - t0 (0) = 10 , the impact value increases.

The stronger the impact (the larger the impact value), the more powerful and vigorous the voice impression is. give the impression of sound.

[Sound effect type table]
9-8 and 9-9 are explanatory diagrams of specific examples of the effect sound type table in this embodiment. The effect sound type table is a storage area for reproducing sound data, and is provided in a storage unit included in the sound control board. 9-8 and 9-9 are provided with "CH", "effect sound type", "effect sound configuration", "playback output content", "impact strength", and "related effect, related state". ing. Various effects, effects modes, etc. that are not described in detail in the explanations of FIGS. 9-8 and 9-9 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 9-8 and 9-9, the effect sound type table is composed of 42 channels "CH01" to "CH42".

Here, the sound data of the effect sound output by the speakers 8L and 8R includes "stereo data" with a relatively large amount of data and "monaural data" with a relatively small amount of data. In this example, music is "stereo data", and effects other than music (speech sounds, sound effects, error notification sounds) are "monaural data".

In the audio reproduction area, two consecutive channels for storing "stereo data" may or may not form a "pair CH". In this case, "monaural data" is stored in one channel of this "pair CH".

<Production sound related to production>
In this embodiment, the sound data of the sound related to the effect (effect sound) is set to be reproduced and output in any one of "CH01" to "CH40". The sound data of the effect sound is stored in a designated channel of 'CH01' to 'CH40' at the timing of reproducing and outputting the effect sound, and is erased from the channel when the reproduction is completed.

``CH01'' contains effects sound type: ``music A'', effects sound configuration: ``music data A'', playback output content: ``singing sound A'', ``accompaniment sound A'', impact strength: ``weak'', related effects , Related state: "BGM for powerful RUSH", "BGM for jackpot round" (music selectable during non-V stock) are stored.

In "CH02", effect sound type: "music B", effect sound configuration: "music data B", playback output content: "singing sound B", "accompaniment sound B", impact strength: "weak", related effects , Related state: "BGM for powerful RUSH", "BGM for jackpot round" (music selectable during non-V stock) are stored.

``CH03'' contains effects sound type: ``music C'', effects sound configuration: ``music data C'', playback output content: ``singing sound C'', ``accompaniment sound C'', impact strength: ``weak'', related effects , Related state: "BGM for powerful RUSH", "BGM for jackpot round" (music selectable during non-V stock) are stored.

In "CH04", effect sound type: "music X", effect sound configuration: "music data X1", playback output contents: "singing sound X1", "accompaniment sound X1", impact strength: "strong", related effects , Related state: "BGM for powerful RUSH", "BGM for jackpot round" (music selectable during V stock) are stored.

``CH05'' contains effects sound type: ``music X'', effects sound configuration: ``music data X2'', playback output content: ``singing sound X2'', ``accompaniment sound X2'', impact strength: ``weak'', related effects , Related state: "BGM for powerful RUSH", "BGM for jackpot round" (music selectable during V stock) are stored.

"CH06" includes effect sound type: "effect sound A "V stock"", effect sound configuration: "first effect sound A" (first effect sound A1: 10R jackpot correspondence, first effect sound A2: 3R jackpot Correspondence), playback output content: "1st dialogue sound A 'b'", "1st sound effect A" (1st sound effect A1, 1st sound effect A2), impact strength: "strong", related production, related State: "1st V stock effect" is stored.

"CH07" contains effect sound type: "effect sound A "V stock"", effect sound configuration: "second effect sound A" (second effect sound A1: 10R big hit, second effect sound A2: 3R big hit supported), playback output contents: "Second dialogue sound A 'Istock'", "Second sound effect A" (second sound effect A1, second sound effect A2), impact strength: "weak", related effects, Related state: "1st V stock effect" is stored.

In "CH08", effect sound type: "effect sound B", playback output content: "effect sound B", impact intensity: "strong", related effect, related state: "CU effect (first movable body effect)" is stored.

In "CH09", the effect sound type: "effect sound C1 'complete'", effect sound configuration: "first effect sound C1", playback output content: "first dialogue sound C1 'ko' (character B voice)" , “first sound effect C”, impact intensity: “strong”, related effects, and related state: “first normal jackpot notification effect” are stored.

In "CH10", the effect sound type: "effect sound C1 'complete'", effect sound configuration: "second effect sound C1", playback output contents: "second dialogue sound C1 'complete' (character B voice)" , “second effect sound C”, impact strength: “weak”, related effects, and related state: “first normal jackpot notification effect” are stored.

In "CH11", the effect sound type: "effect sound C2 'Victory'", effect sound configuration: "first effect sound C2", playback output content: "first dialogue sound C2 'Vi' (character A voice)" , “first sound effect C”, impact strength: “strong”, related effects, and related state: “second normal jackpot notification effect (second movable body effect)” are stored.

In "CH12", the effect sound type: "effect sound C2 'Victory'", effect sound configuration: "second effect sound C2", playback output content: "second dialogue sound C2 'kutori' (character A voice)" , “second effect sound C”, impact strength: “weak”, related effects, and related state: “second normal jackpot notification effect (second movable body effect)” are stored.

In "CH13", the effect sound type: "effect sound C3 'congratulation'", effect sound configuration: "first effect sound C3", playback output content: "first dialogue sound C3 'ko' (character A voice )”, “first sound effect C”, impact strength: “strong”, related effects, and related state: “third normal jackpot notification effect (third movable body effect)” are stored.

"CH14" contains effects sound type: "effect sound C3 'congratulation'", effect sound configuration: "second effect sound C3", playback output content: "second dialogue sound C3 'congratulation' ( Character A Voice)", "Second Sound Effect C", Impact Strength: "Weak", Related Performance, Related State: "Third Normal Jackpot Notification Performance (Third Movable Body Performance)" are stored.

In "CH15", the effect sound type: "effect sound D1 'Victory'", effect sound configuration: "first effect sound D1", playback output content: "first dialogue sound D1 'Vi' (character A voice)" , "1st sound effect D", impact intensity: "strong", related effects, related state: "1st right hit big hit notification effect", "1st right hit special big hit notification effect" (Powerful RUSH: dream dream mode) is stored.

"CH16" contains the type of sound effect: "sound effect D1 'Victory'", the structure of the sound effect: "second sound effect D1", and the content of playback output: "second dialogue sound D1 'kutori' (character A voice)". , "Second sound effect D", Impact strength: "Weak", Related production, Related state: "Big hit notification production when hitting the first right", "Special big hit notification production when hitting the first right" (Powerful RUSH: Yume Yume mode) is stored.

"CH17" contains the type of sound effect: "sound effect D2 'Victory'", the structure of the sound effect: "first sound effect D2", and the content of playback output: "first dialogue sound D2 'Vi' (character B voice)". , "1st sound effect D", impact strength: "strong", related effects, related state: "big hit notification effect at second right hit", "special big hit report effect at second right hit" (powerful RUSH: Nana mode) is stored.

In "CH18", the effect sound type: "effect sound D2 'Victory'", effect sound configuration: "second effect sound D2", playback output content: "second dialogue sound D2 'kutori' (character B voice)" , "Second sound effect D", Impact strength: "Weak", Related production, Related state: "Big hit notification production when hitting the second right", "Special big hit notification production when hitting the second right" (Powerful RUSH: Nana mode) is stored.

"CH19" contains the type of sound effect: "sound effect D3 'Victory'", the structure of the sound effect: "first sound effect D3", and the content of playback output: "first dialogue sound D3 'Vi' (character C voice)". , "1st sound effect D", impact intensity: "strong", related effects, related state: "3rd right hit big hit notification effect", "3rd right hit special big hit notification effect" (powerful RUSH: jam mode ) is stored.

In "CH20", the effect sound type: "effect sound D3 'Victory'", effect sound configuration: "second effect sound D3", playback output content: "second dialogue sound D3 'kutori' (character C voice)" , "Second sound effect D", Impact strength: "Weak", Related production, Related state: "3rd right hit big hit notification effect", "3rd right hit special big hit notification effect" (Powerful RUSH: Jam mode ) is stored.

In "CH21", the effect sound type: "effect sound EA 'ready go'", effect sound configuration: "first effect sound E", reproduction output content: "first dialogue sound E 'ready'", "first "Sound effect E", impact strength: "weak", related effects, and related state: "change portent effects: success pattern" are stored.

In "CH22", effect sound type: "effect sound EA 'ready go'", effect sound configuration: "second effect sound EA", reproduction output content: "second dialogue sound EA 'go'", "second "Sound effect EA", impact strength: "strong", related effects, and related state: "change portent effects: success pattern" are stored.

In "CH23", effect sound type: "effect sound EA 'ready go'", effect sound configuration: "third effect sound EA", reproduction output contents: "third dialogue sound EA 'go'", "third "Sound effect EA", impact strength: "weak", related effects, and related state: "change portent effects: success pattern" are stored.

In "CH24", the effect sound type: "effect sound EB 'lady...'", effect sound configuration: "first effect sound E", playback output content: "first dialogue sound E 'ready'", " First sound effect E", impact strength: "weak", related effects, and related state: "change portent effects: failure pattern" are stored.

In "CH25", the effect sound type: "effect sound EB 'ready...'", effect sound configuration: "second effect sound EB", playback output content: "second effect sound EB", impact strength: " Weak", related effect, related state: "Change precursor effect: failure pattern" is stored.

In "CH26", the effect sound type: "effect sound F '3.2.1 start'", effect sound configuration: "first effect sound F1", playback output content: "first dialogue sound F1" 1 (one )”, “first sound effect F1”, impact strength: “weak”, related performance, related state: “time-saving rush performance” are stored.

In "CH27", the effect sound type: "effect sound F '3.2.1 start'", effect sound configuration: "first effect sound F2", reproduction output content: "first dialogue sound F2" 2 (two )”, “first sound effect F2”, impact strength: “weak”, related performance, related state: “time-saving rush performance” are stored.

In "CH28", the effect sound type: "effect sound F '3.2.1 start'", effect sound configuration: "first effect sound F3", playback output content: "first dialogue sound F3" 3 (three )”, “first sound effect F3”, impact strength: “weak”, related performance, related state: “shortening rush performance” are stored.

In "CH29", the effect sound type: "effect sound F '3.2.1 start'", effect sound configuration: "second effect sound F", reproduction output content: "second dialogue sound F "su"" , “second sound effect F”, impact intensity: “strong”, related effects, and related state: “shortening rush effect” are stored.

In "CH30", the effect sound type: "effect sound F '3.2.1 start'", effect sound configuration: "third effect sound F", playback output content: "third dialogue sound F 'tart'" , “third sound effect F”, impact strength: “weak”, related effects, and related state: “shortening rush effect” are stored.

In "CH31", the effect sound type: "effect sound G 'powerful'", effect sound configuration: "first effect sound G", playback output content: "first dialogue sound G 'pa'", "first effect "Sound G", impact strength: "strong", related effects, and related state: "story SP development effects" are stored.

"CH32" contains effects sound type: "effect sound G 'powerful'", effect sound configuration: "second effect sound G", playback output content: "second dialogue sound G 'waffle'", "second effect "sound G", impact intensity: "weak", related effect, related state: "story SP development effect" are stored.

In "CH33", the effect sound type: "effect sound H 'crae'", playback output contents: "dialogue sound H 'crae'", "sound effect H", impact strength: "strong", related effects, Related state: "When the operation unit is operated during the annihilation SP" is stored.

"CH34" contains effects sound type: "effect sound I1 'press'", playback output content: "dialogue sound I1 'press' (character A voice)", "sound effect I1", impact intensity: "strong", Related effect, related state: "operation prompting display" is stored.

"CH35" contains effects sound type: "effect sound I2 'press'", playback output contents: "dialogue sound I2 'press' (character B voice)", "sound effect I2", impact intensity: "strong", Related effect, related state: "operation prompting display" is stored.

"CH36" contains effects sound type: "effect sound I3 'press'", playback output content: "dialogue sound I3 'press' (character C voice)", "sound effect I3", impact strength: "strong", Related effect, related state: "operation prompting display" is stored.

"CH37" contains effect sound type: "effect sound I4 'press'", playback output content: "dialogue sound I4 'press' (3 character voices of character A, character B, and character C)", "sound effect I4", impact strength: "strong", related effects, and related state: "operation prompting display" are stored.

In "CH38", the effect sound type: "effect sound J 'fever'", effect sound configuration: "first effect sound J", playback output contents: "first dialogue sound J 'phi'", "first effect "sound J", impact strength: "strong", related effect, related state: "revival effect" are stored.

"CH39" contains effects sound type: "effect sound J 'fever'", effect sound configuration: "second effect sound J", playback output content: "second dialogue sound J '(F)-bar'", " Second sound effect J", impact strength: "weak", related effect, related state: "revival effect" are stored.

"CH40" stores effect sound type: "effect sound K", reproduction output content: "sound effect K", impact intensity: "strong", related effect, and related state: "premier effect". In this embodiment, in the variable display, it is possible to execute a premium effect to notify that the display result will be a "big hit" at a timing (at the start of the fluctuation, at the establishment of the ready-to-win state, etc.) that should not be originally notified.

<Error notification sound>
The error notification sound in this embodiment includes an abnormal winning error sound and a magnetism detection error sound. The abnormal winning error sound (error notification sound A) is an error sound detected when a game ball wins at a time other than a predetermined time such as when the special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is opened. The magnetic detection error sound (error notification sound B) is an error sound that is detected when the magnetic detection sensor connected to the main substrate 11 detects a magnetic force of a predetermined value or more.

Here, the error notification sound has a higher priority to be notified to the player than other effect sounds such as music. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-9, "CH41" and "CH42" are reserved as fixed channels for reproducing each error notification sound.

"CH41" stores effect sound type: "error notification sound A", reproduction output content: "error sound effect A", impact intensity: "strong", related effect, related state: "abnormal winning". .

"CH42" stores effect sound type: "error notification sound B", reproduction output content: "error sound effect B", impact strength: "strong", related effect, related state: "magnetic detection". .

When any one of these errors is detected, a channel specific to the error notification sound is designated based on the error notification sound reproduction output command for the error that has occurred, and the specified channel is designated. In the channel, monaural data of error notification sound is reproduced and output.

In addition, each channel of "CH01" to "CH42" in the audio playback area shown in FIGS. is set.

The "basic volume" is a value indicating the loudness of the sound data itself. The basic sound volume can be set according to the priority to be notified to the player. In this example, the basic volume can be set between "1" and "5". It is assumed that the larger the numerical value of the basic sound volume, the higher the sound pressure level of the output sound (the output sound is emphasized).

Here, as shown in FIGS. 9-8 and 9-9, the basic sound volume differs depending on the type of effect sound. Specifically, "error notification sound A (abnormal winning)" and "error notification sound B (magnetic detection)" have the maximum basic sound volume of "5". On the other hand, the sound data of the effect sound related to the effect has a basic volume of "4" or less ("3" or "4"). This is because the effect sound is less likely to be directly related to the player's cheating than the abnormal prize winning error and the magnetism detection error, and has a low priority to be notified to the player.

Further, among the sound data of the sound effect, the basic sound volume differs according to the type of the sound effect. In this example, the basic sound volume of the effect sounds associated with the songs "CH01" to "CH05" is "3". On the other hand, the basic sound volume of the effect sound related to the effect other than the musical pieces “CH06” to “CH40” is “4”.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to such a form, and a plurality of basic volume levels may be set for the sound data of the effect sound.

For example, "1", "2", "3", and "4" are set as the basic volume of [first sound effect A] "B" of sound effect A. When [first effect sound A] is reproduced four times in succession with scratch processing, the first [first effect sound A] (basic volume: 1), the second [first effect sound A] (basic volume: 2), the third [1st effect sound A] (basic volume: 3), the 4th [1st effect sound A] (basic volume: 4), and so on. It may become louder and the output volume may also be made louder. Also, the first [first effect sound A] (basic volume: 4), the second [first effect sound A] (basic volume: 3), the third [first effect sound A] (basic volume: 2), the fourth [first effect sound A] (basic volume: 1), and as the number of times of output increases, the basic volume may decrease, and the output volume may also decrease.

It can also be applied to effect sounds related to music. When [music data X1] is reproduced four times in succession with scratch processing, the first [music data X1] (basic volume: 1), the second [music data X1] (basic volume: 2) , [music data X1] (basic volume: 3) for the third time, [music data X1] (basic volume: 4) for the fourth time, and so on. may Also, the first [music data X1] (basic volume: 4), the second [music data X1] (basic volume: 3), the third [music data X1] (basic volume: 2), the fourth [Music data X1] (basic volume: 1), and as the number of times of output increases, the basic volume may decrease, and the output volume may also decrease.

"Channel setting ratio" is a volume value specified for each channel. The channel setting ratio can be set from maximum volume "1", which is 100% of the reference output volume, to full mute "0", which is 0% for each channel.

“Volume value” is the upper limit value (volume value) of the volume that can be output from the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In this example, the master volume can be set between "1" and "5". This volume value can be set to an arbitrary value by the player performing a predetermined operation (for example, operating the up and down buttons of the performance keys provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The "output volume" is the volume of sound reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The output volume is determined based on the "basic volume", "channel setting ratio", and "volume value" of the sound data. The output volume is a numerical value obtained by multiplying the "basic volume", the "channel setting ratio", and the "volume value". In this example, the output volume can be set between "0" and "25".

As shown in FIG. 9-9, an error notification sound having a high priority to be notified to a player is reproduced and output by fixed "CH41" and "CH42". In the fixed channels "CH41" and "CH42", unlike the other channels ("CH01" to "CH40"), the maximum output sound volume is set to a fixed value of "5" for reproduction and output. Specifically, in "CH41" and "CH42", the volume value is always set to the maximum value without accepting a predetermined operation by the player (for example, operating the up and down buttons of the effect keys provided in the pachinko game machine 1). is fixed at "5".

<Fade, Mute>
Next, fade (fade-out, fade-in) and mute, which are processes for changing the "output volume", will be described. These fade-outs, fade-ins, and mutes are executed by changing the "output volume" along with changing the "channel setting ratio" shown in FIGS. 9-8 and 9-9.

Here, in the fade-out, the output sound volume is gradually decreased by executing the process of gradually decreasing the channel setting ratio of the effect sound being reproduced and outputted from "1 (100%)" to "0 (0%)". is reduced to "0". In fade-in, the output volume is gradually increased by gradually increasing the channel setting ratio of the effect sound being reproduced and output from "0 (0%)" to "1 (100%)". is increased to the maximum value.

For example, the channel setting ratio of the effect sound (second effect sound) reproduced after the scratch-processed effect sound (first effect sound A) is changed from “1 (100%)” to “0 (0%)”. It is also possible to gradually decrease and fade out.

Also, in the mute process, the output volume of the effect sound being reproduced and output is set to "0" by executing the process of setting the channel setting ratio of the effect sound being reproduced and output to "0 (0%)". executed. Note that while the mute is being executed, the output volume is "0", but the effect sound itself is being reproduced. When an error notification sound having a high priority to be notified to the player is being output, the other channels "CH01" to "CH40" may all be muted.

In this way, in fade-out, the output volume of the effect sound being reproduced is gradually decreased and finally becomes "0" (for example, 1 (100%) → 0.5 (50%) → 0 ( 0%)), whereas in muting, the output volume of the effect sound being reproduced and output immediately becomes "0" (for example, 1 (100%)→0 (0%)). In other words, mute is control that lowers the output volume of the effect sound (to 0) in a shorter time than fade-out, and is control that greatly lowers the output volume per time.

[Complementary color contrast]
In this embodiment, when the display colors of the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 are in a complementary color relationship, the saturation of the display colors becomes stronger and the phenomenon appears more vivid. ” (hereinafter appropriately referred to as “complementary color inversion”). Complementary colors are colors that are opposite to each other on the color wheel, which will be described later. In addition to colors on the color wheel, they are black relative to white (white relative to black).

<Color wheel>
A color wheel is a circular arrangement of hues and is one of the methods used to organize colors. Colors are perceived as continuously changing red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and violet depending on the wavelength of light. A ring formed by continuously arranging these colors is called a hue circle.

In order to convey colors accurately, we need a regular color notation. In this embodiment, this color display system is called a color order system (color system), and can be represented by a color wheel. As shown in FIG. 9-10 (1), the color system in this embodiment consists of six basic hues (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, purple) and intermediate hues (red orange, It consists of 12 hues including yellow-orange, yellow-green, blue-green, blue-purple, and red-purple.

In this embodiment, the colors that are complementary to the specific color on the color wheel are the colors on the opposite side of the specific color on the color wheel and their approximations (one adjacent color on each side). For example, colors that are complementary to yellow are purple on the opposite side of yellow on the color wheel and its approximate colors (reddish purple and bluish purple on both sides).

<black and white>
In this embodiment, white and black, which are not included in the color wheel, are also complementary colors. As shown in FIG. 9-10(2), in this embodiment, the color complementary to white is black, and the color complementary to black is white.

In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which complementary color contrast is used as a method of increasing the saturation of the display color of the image displayed on the image display device 5 to make the image appear more vivid. First, the following method may be used as a method of increasing the saturation of the display color of the image displayed on the image display device 5 to make the image appear more vivid.

・Brightness reversal Brightness reversal is a method of reversing the brightness of the display color of an image. For example, a bright portion of the display color becomes darker, and a dark portion of the display color becomes brighter.

・Gradation reversal Gradation reversal is a technique in which the brightness and color of the display color of an image are reversed. For example, the brightness is inverted and the complementary color is inverted.

[Movable body]
In this embodiment, a movable body YM, which is an accessory, is provided in the vicinity of the image display device 5 (upper center). The movable body YM follows the control of the effect control board 12, the initial position, the first operating position (the position where a part of the movable body overlaps the area of the image display device 5), and the second operating position (the entirety of the movable body). overlaps the area of the image display device 5). Hereinafter, the first motion position and the second motion position are appropriately referred to as "effect positions".

For example, the movable body YM moves from the initial position→the first operating position→the initial position, or moves from the initial position→the second operating position→the initial position, or moves from the initial position→the first operating position→the second operating position→the initial position. The operation may be performed from the initial position, or from the second operation position→the first operation position→the initial position.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-11(1), the movable body YM is not positioned in front of the image display device 5 when the movable body YM is at the initial position. That is, in the present embodiment, when the movable body YM is at the initial position, it does not overlap the area of the image display device 5 and does not affect the visibility of the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It's becoming

On the other hand, in the process of moving the movable body YM from the initial position to the effect position (first action position, second action position), or when the movable body YM is in the effect position, the movable body YM is displayed on the image display device 5. It is positioned forward. That is, in the present embodiment, the area of the image display device 5 overlaps and is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in the process of moving the movable body YM from the initial position to the effect position and when the movable body YM is in the effect position. It has a configuration that affects the visibility of the image that is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 9-11(2), in the process of moving the movable body YM from the initial position to the first operating position, or when the movable body YM is in the first operating position, the movable body YM moves to the position of the image display device 5. It overlaps the upper center area of the screen and affects the visibility of part of the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-11(3), in the process of moving the movable body YM from the initial position to the second operating position, or when the movable body YM is in the second operating position, the movable body YM moves to the image display device. 5 and affects the visibility of part of the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 .

In this embodiment, the movable body YM is assumed to move to the performance position when a CU performance suggesting that the degree of expectation of a big win is high during the battle SP or a big win notification performance of notifying a big win is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the movable body YM has a regular hexagonal shape including a design that imitates the ally character A. As shown in FIG. The friend character A of this movable body YM is a character common to the friend character A that appears in the super reach effect (in this example, the battle SP effect and the story SP effect).

[Game flow]
Next, the game flow in this embodiment will be described. In this example, the game state is controlled to a normal state (low probability/low base state), and the effect mode when the first flag and the second flag described later are not set is set to [normal mode], and the game The state is controlled to either a time-saving state (low probability / high base state) or a normal state (low probability / low base state), and the production mode when the first flag described later is set is [Challenge mode ], the game state is controlled to either a time-saving state (low probability / high base state) or a normal state (low probability / low base state), and the effect when the second flag described later is set The mode is set to [Rush Mode].

In the example of the game flow shown in FIG. 9-12, when the production mode is [normal mode], a big hit occurs, and after the end of the big hit game state, it is controlled to a time saving state (low probability / high base state), [challenge Mode] (1 time reduction + 4 suspension rotations) or [Rush mode] (99 rotations + 4 suspension rotations), and when a big hit occurs, [Rush mode] (7 rotations + 4 suspension rotations, or Time-saving 99 rotations + holding 4 rotations), and when no big hit occurs, it shifts to [Normal mode].

(1) When the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state) and the first flag and the second flag, which will be described later, are not set, the production mode is set to [normal mode].

(2) In the state of (1) described above, when a variable display is executed in which the display result is "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state. In this embodiment, there are "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot" and "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" as the first special symbol jackpot types, and (2A) as an example of production when the jackpot type is "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot", The characters "BONUS" for notifying the 3R big win are displayed on the image display device 5, and (2B) the 10R big win is shown as an example of the effect in the case where the big win type is "symbol 10R time-saving big win". The characters “MAX BONUS” to be notified are displayed on the image display device 5 .

(3) When the above-mentioned (2A) jackpot type is the "symbol 3R time saving jackpot", when the jackpot ends, the effect control CPU 120 sets the (3A-I) first flag, and the game state changes to the time saving state ( (3A-II) When the first flag is set and the game state is changed to the normal state (low probability/low base state) Under control, when the suspension memory (variable display with execution suspended (up to 4 in this example)) corresponding to the start winning that occurred at (3A-I) is executed, the production mode is changed to [ Challenge mode]. As an example of an effect when the effect mode is the [challenge mode], the image display device 5 displays characters of "RUSH challenge" to notify that the effect mode will shift to the [challenge mode].

In the state of (3), all the display results are "missed", one variable display in the time saving state, and the suspension memory corresponding to the start winning that occurred at this time (execution is suspended (up to 4 in this example) When (1) and (1) are executed, the state (1) is established. In this example, when the state (3) is controlled to the state (1), the state (1A) (the effect mode is [normal mode (sunny mode)]) is controlled.

(4) When the jackpot type (6A) described later is "3R jackpot B" or (6B) "10R jackpot B", when the jackpot ends, the effect control CPU 120 (4A-I) second flag is set, the game state is controlled to the time saving state (low accuracy / high base state), and when the variable display is executed 7 times, (4A-II) the second flag is set, the game state is normal Under the control of the state (low probability/low base state), a pending memory (variable display in which the execution is suspended (up to 4 in this example)) corresponding to the start winning that occurred at (4A-I) The production mode at the time of execution is set to [rush mode]. As an example of an effect when the effect mode is the [rush mode], the characters "powerful RUSH" are displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that the effect mode will shift to the [rush mode].

In the state of (4), all the display results are "missed", 7 variable displays in the time saving state, and suspension memory corresponding to the start winning that occurred at this time (execution is suspended (up to 4 in this example) When (1) and (1) are executed, the state (1) is established.

(5) When the above-mentioned (2B) jackpot type is "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" ends, or when the jackpot ends when (6C) "10R jackpot A" to be described later ends, effect control The CPU 120 (5B-I) sets the second flag, controls the game state to a time-saving state (low accuracy/high base state), and executes variable display 99 times (1st to 99th rotations). When (5B-II) the second flag is set, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability / low base state), and the hold corresponding to the start winning that occurred at (5B-I) When the memory (variable display whose execution is suspended (maximum of 4 in this example)) is executed, the production mode is set to [rush mode] (with V stock).

Also, in a state where the V stock flag (see FIG. 9-47) described later is set, (6A) the jackpot type is "3R jackpot B" or (6B) "10R jackpot B". is completed, control is performed in (5B-I) and (5B-II) described above.

As an example of the effect when the effect mode is [Rush mode] (with V stock), a rainbow-colored telop display and the characters “Powerful RUSH” notifying that the effect mode will shift to [Rush mode] (V stock) is displayed on the image display device 5 .

In the state of (5), all the display results are "missed", 99 variable display in the time saving state, and the suspension memory corresponding to the start winning that occurred at this time (execution is suspended (up to 4 in this example) When (1) and (1) are executed, the state (1) is established. However, in the variable display of the second special symbol, in this embodiment in which a small hit occurs with a probability of about 1/7, the state of (5) in which the number of times of time reduction control is 99 times is the variable display of the second special symbol. When is executed, it can be said that the next big hit via the small win is virtually confirmed, so the example of being controlled from the state of (5) to the state of (1) is not shown. .

(6) When the production mode is [challenge mode] (see (3)), or when the production mode is [rush mode] (see (4) and (5)), in any of the variable displays When the display result becomes "big win" or "minor win", it is controlled to a big win game state (including a big win game state via a small win). In this embodiment, when the display result is a "jackpot", the second special symbol jackpot types include a "symbol 3R time-saving big hit" and a "symbol 10R time-saving big hit", and the display result is a "small hit". There are "3 (2) R time-saving big hit via small win" and "10 (9) R time-saving big hit via small win" as types of second special symbol via small win when it becomes.

(6A) As an example of the effect when the jackpot type is the "3R jackpot", the characters "BONUS" are displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that the jackpot is substantially the 3R jackpot, and (6B) the jackpot type. is ``10R jackpot A'' or ``10R jackpot B'' in the ``10R jackpot'', the characters ``MAX FEVER'' are displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that it is substantially a 10R jackpot. (6C) As an example of an effect when the jackpot type is "10R jackpot A" among "10R jackpots", the characters "VSTOCK BONUS" for notifying that it is substantially a 10R jackpot are displayed on the image display device. 5 is displayed. At this time, among the jackpot types of the “10R time saving jackpot”, “10R jackpot A” with 99 times of time saving control and “10R jackpot B” with 7 times of time saving control are set.

[Production determination process at the time of start winning]
When a start winning occurs, the CPU 103 outputs, out of the determination results at the time of winning, a determination result as to whether or not it will be a big win, a symbol designation command indicating the determination result of the type of the big win, and a variation pattern out of the determination results at the time of winning. and a reserved memory number addition designation command (first reserved memory number addition designation command, second reserved memory number addition designation command) that designates that the number of reserved memories has increased by 1. It is transmitted to the control CPU 120 .

FIG. 9-13 is a flow chart showing the effect determination process at the time of start winning. The effect control CPU 120 executes the start winning effect determination process in the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process shown in FIG.

In the starting winning effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a set of starting winning commands based on the occurrence of the starting winning to the starting winning opening (for example, symbol designation command, variable category designation command, and , 1st or 2nd reserved storage number addition designation command) is newly received (step S05TM1010).

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether a set of symbol designating commands, variable category designating commands, and first or second reserved storage number addition designating commands are newly stored in the start winning command storage area. determine whether or not If the command for one set of starting winnings has not been newly received (step S05TM1010: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

When one set of starting winning commands is newly received (step S05TM1010: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a change prefetch prohibition flag (described later) is set (step S05TM1020). If the change look-ahead prohibition flag is set (step S05TM1020: YES), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

In the present embodiment, the change look-ahead prohibition flag is set based on the fact that it is determined that either a change effect (suspended change effect, active change effect), which will be described later, or an R-suspended effect, which will be described later, will be executed at least once. It is a kind of flag that is set by Since the processing of steps S05TM1030 to S05TM1070 is skipped by setting the change look-ahead prohibition flag, a change effect or R-suspend effect is given to the pending memory whose execution is suspended or the active display currently being executed. In the state of being determined to be executed, it is possible to limit the execution of the change performance of changing the suspension display or active display and the R suspension performance for the variable display corresponding to the new start winning. This change look-ahead prohibition flag is erased when the variable display corresponding to the effect determination processing at the time of start winning when the change look-ahead prohibition flag is set is completed.

If the change look-ahead prohibition flag is not set (step S05TM1020: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display, the table for determining the final display mode of the active display (FIG. 9-14 (A ))) (step S05TM1030).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern of the pending display and the active display based on the change pattern determination table (see FIGS. 9-14 (B1) to 9-15 (B4)) (step S05TM1040). .

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect type of the changed effect, which will be described later, based on the table (see FIG. 9-16(A)) for determining the effect type of the changed effect (step S05TM1050).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute a change sign effect, which will be described later (step S05TM1060). If it is determined not to execute the change portent effect (step S05TM1060: NO), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S05TM1080.

When it is decided to execute the change sign effect (step S05TM1060: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the R pending effect is executed or not, and the table (Fig. 9- 16(B)) (step S05TM1070).

After step S05TM1070 or after step S05TM1060: NO, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is decided to execute either the change effect or the R suspension effect (step S05TM1080).

If it is decided not to execute either the change effect or the R suspension effect (step S05TM1080: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

If it is determined to execute either the change effect or the R suspension effect (step S05TM1080: YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets a change look-ahead counter (step S05TM1090), which will be described later, and sets a change look-ahead prohibition flag. set (step S05TM1100) and the process ends.

In this embodiment, a look-ahead counter is set to indicate the number of variable displays until the variable display targeted for the look-ahead preview effect is executed. In this example, a look-ahead counter that indicates the number of times of variable display until a variable display that is the target of the change performance or the R-holding performance among the look-ahead prediction effects is executed is referred to as a "change look-ahead counter".

[Tables referenced in the start-up prize-winning effect determination process]
FIGS. 9-14 to 9-16 are specific examples of tables referred to in any one of the start winning effects determination process. FIG. 9-14A is an example of an active display final display mode determination table that is referred to when determining the final display mode of active display in step S05TM1030. FIGS. 9-14(B1) to 9-15(B4) are an example of the change pattern determination table referred to when determining the change pattern of pending display and active display in step S05TM1040. FIG. 9-16(A) is an example of the effect type determination table of the changing effect referred to when determining the effect type of the changing effect in step S05TM1050. FIG. 9-16(B) is an example of an execution/non-execution determination table for the R-suspended effect that is referenced when determining whether or not to execute the R-suspended effect in step S05TM1070.

<Table for Determining Final Display Mode of Active Display>
FIG. 9-14A is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the final display mode determination table for active display. As shown in FIG. 9-14(A), in this embodiment, any one of "normal mode", "blue mode", "red mode" and "gold mode" is selected as the final display mode of active display. Decision values are assigned to each of these modes.

As shown in FIG. 9-14 (A), when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "loss" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss"), the starting winning The final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on (new reserved memory) is the normal mode (white round display) at a rate of 90%, and the blue mode (blue round display) at a rate of 5%. ), and at a rate of 3%, it becomes a red mode (red circular display), and at a rate of 2%, it becomes a gold mode (golden circular display).

On the other hand, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, if the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), variable display based on the starting winning (new pending memory) The final display mode of the active display corresponding to 75% is the normal mode, 6% is the blue mode, 9% is the red mode, and 10% is the gold mode.

In this way, the final display mode of the active display has the expectation of a big hit in the relationship of normal mode<blue mode<red mode<gold mode.

<Change pattern determination table>
FIGS. 9-14 (B1) and (B2), and FIGS. 9-15 (B3) and (B4) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of change pattern determination tables for pending display and active display. When the number of pending memories becomes n (n: 1 to 4) due to the start winning, (i) the timing at which the n-th hold display corresponding to the start winning is displayed in the hold display area (at the time of the start winning) timing), (ii) the timing at which the pending display corresponding to the starting winning shifts to a higher position (active display area side) in the change order in the pending display area (when n≧2), and (iii) that Display information (holding display or active display) may be displayed in a manner different from the normal manner.

In the descriptions of FIGS. 9-14 (B1) and (B2) and FIGS. 9-15 (B3) and (B4), active shift means that the suspended display shifts from the suspended display area to the active display area. (As a result, the active display corresponding to the variable display that was the determination target at the time of starting winning is displayed).

In FIGS. 9-14 (B1) and (B2) and FIGS. 9-15 (B3) and (B4), display corresponding to variable display at each timing of (i) to (iii) for each change pattern It shows how the information (suspended display or active display) is displayed. In the change patterns shown in the figure, "normal" indicates a normal mode that is a white circular display, "blue" indicates a blue mode that is a blue circular display, and "red" indicates a red mode, which is a red circular display, and "gold" indicates a gold mode, which is a gold circular display.

([For one hold] Change pattern determination table)
Effect control CPU 120 selects the change pattern determination table for one pending memory shown in FIG. . A determination value is assigned to one of the change patterns 101 to 108 corresponding to the determined final display mode of the active display.

The change pattern 101 is a change pattern in which the suspension display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then the suspension display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift, that is, the change pattern from normal to normal. be.

Similarly, changing pattern 102 is normal→blue, changing pattern 103 is blue→blue, changing pattern 104 is blue→red, changing pattern 105 is red→red, changing pattern 106 is blue→gold, and changing pattern 107 is red. →Golden, the change pattern 108 is a change pattern from gold to gold.

Here, the final display mode of the determined active display is determined regardless of the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, "loss", "big hit", or "small hit") In the case of the normal mode, determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 101 is determined at a rate of 100%.

In addition, when the final display mode of the determined active display is the blue mode, the determination value is set so that the change pattern 101 is determined at a rate of 40%, the change pattern 102 at 30%, and the change pattern 103 at a rate of 30%. is allocated.

When the final display mode of the determined active display is the red mode, the variation pattern 101 is 20%, the variation pattern 102 is 20%, the variation pattern 103 is 20%, the variation pattern 104 is 20%, and the variation pattern 104 is 20%. Judgment values are assigned so that 105 is determined at a rate of 20%.

In addition, when the final display mode of the determined active display is the gold mode, determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 101 is determined at a rate of 65% and the change patterns 102 to 108 are each determined at a rate of 5%. is

([For 2 pending] Change pattern determination table)
Effect control CPU 120 selects the change pattern determination table for 2 reservations shown in FIG. . A determination value is assigned to one of the change patterns 201 to 211 corresponding to the determined final display mode of the active display.

In the change pattern 201, after the suspension display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the suspension display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the notice target is displayed at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern that does not change the pending display of , in a normal mode, that is, a change pattern of normal→normal→normal.

Similarly, changing pattern 202 is normal → normal → blue, changing pattern 203 is normal → blue → blue, changing pattern 204 is blue → blue → blue, changing pattern 205 is normal → blue red, changing pattern 206 is blue → The changing pattern 207 is blue→red→red, the changing pattern 208 is red→red→red, the changing pattern 209 is blue→red→gold, and the changing pattern 210 is red→gold→gold. A change pattern, a change pattern 211, is a change pattern of gold→gold→gold.

Here, the final display mode of the determined active display is determined regardless of the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, "loss", "big hit", or "small hit") For the normal mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 201 is determined at a rate of 100%.

Further, when the determined final display mode of the active display is the blue mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change patterns 201 to 204 are each determined at a rate of 25%.

Further, when the final display mode of the determined active display is the red mode, the determination values are assigned so that the changing pattern 201 is determined at a rate of 30% and the changing patterns 202 to 208 are each determined at a rate of 10%. is

In addition, when the final display mode of the determined active display is the gold mode, determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 201 is determined at a rate of 50% and the change patterns 202 to 211 are each determined at a rate of 5%. is

([For 3 pending] Change pattern determination table)
Effect control CPU 120 selects the change pattern determination table for 3 pending items shown in FIG. . A determination value is assigned to one of the change patterns 301 to 309 in accordance with the determined final display mode of the active display.

In the change pattern 301, after the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the timing of the second hold shift. In this change pattern, the suspension display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode, and the suspension display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift, that is, the change pattern of normal→normal→normal→normal.

Similarly, the changing pattern 302 is normal→normal→blue→blue, the changing pattern 303 is normal→blue→blue→blue, the changing pattern 304 is blue→blue→blue→blue, and the changing pattern 305 is normal→blue→red. → red, pattern 306 is blue → blue → red → red, pattern 307 is blue → red → red → red, pattern 308 is pattern red → red → red → red, pattern 309 is gold → gold → red. It is a change pattern from gold to gold.

Here, the final display mode of the determined active display is determined regardless of the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, "loss", "big hit", or "small hit") In the case of the normal mode, determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 301 is determined at a rate of 100%.

Further, when the determined final display mode of the active display is the blue mode, the determination values are assigned such that the change patterns 301 to 304 are each determined at a rate of 25%.

Further, when the final display mode of the determined active display is the red mode, the determination values are assigned such that the changing pattern 301 is determined at a rate of 30% and the changing patterns 302 to 308 are each determined at a rate of 10%. is

Further, when the final display mode of the determined active display is the gold mode, determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 301 is determined at a rate of 60% and the change patterns 302 to 309 are each determined at a rate of 5%. is

([For 4 pending] Change pattern determination table)
Effect control CPU 120 selects the change pattern determination table for 4 reserved pieces shown in FIG. . A judgment value is assigned to one of the change patterns 401 to 413 corresponding to the determined final display mode of the active display.

In the change pattern 401, after the suspension display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the suspension display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the timing of the second hold shift. does not change the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode, does not change the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and changes the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change as it is, that is, a change pattern of normal->normal->normal->normal->normal.

Similarly, the change pattern 402 is normal→normal→normal→blue→blue, the change pattern 403 is normal→normal→blue→blue→blue, the change pattern 404 is normal→blue→blue→blue→blue, and the change pattern 405. blue→blue→blue→blue→blue change pattern 406 is normal→normal→blue→red→red; change pattern 407 is normal→blue→blue→red→red; change pattern 408 is normal→blue→red→red→ Red, changing pattern 409 is blue → blue → blue → red → red, changing pattern 410 is blue → blue → red → red → red, changing pattern 411 is blue → red → red → red → red, changing pattern 412 is red → A change pattern of red->red->red->red, and a change pattern 413 is a change pattern of gold->gold->gold->gold->gold.

Here, the final display mode of the determined active display is determined regardless of the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, "loss", "big hit", or "small hit") In the case of the normal mode, determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 401 is determined at a rate of 100%.

Further, when the determined final display mode of the active display is the blue mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change patterns 401 to 405 are each determined at a rate of 20%.

Further, when the final display mode of the determined active display is the red mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 401 is determined at a rate of 12% and the change patterns 402 to 412 are each determined at a rate of 8%. is

Further, when the final display mode of the determined active display is the gold mode, determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 401 is determined at a rate of 40% and the change patterns 402 to 413 are each determined at a rate of 5%. is

[Production type determination table for change production]
FIG. 9-16(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect type determination table of the change effect. As shown in FIG. 9-16(A), in this embodiment, the types of change effects are "normal change effect (change sign effect: none)", "special change effect (change sign effect: success pattern). ”, “no change effect (change precursor effect: failure pattern)”, and “no change effect (change precursor effect: none)”, and a judgment value is assigned to each of these. is The normal change effect, the special change effect, and the change precursor effect (success pattern, failure pattern) will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 9-16(A), the final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new reserved memory) is the normal mode, and the change patterns are the change patterns 101, 201, and 301. , or 401, as the effect type of the change effect, no change effect (change precursor effect: failure pattern) is determined at a rate of 2% and no change effect (change precursor effect: none) at a rate of 98%. Judgment values are assigned as follows.

Also, if the final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new pending memory) is the normal mode and the change pattern is none of the change patterns 101, 201, 301, or 401, the change As the effect type of the effect, the judgment value is assigned so that no change effect (change sign effect: no effect) is determined at a rate of 100%.

Further, when the final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new pending memory) is the blue mode, the effect type of the change effect is as follows, regardless of the change pattern. Determination values are assigned so that the normal change effect (predictive change effect: none) is determined at a rate of 100%.

Further, when the final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new pending memory) is the red mode and the change pattern is any one of the change patterns 101, 201, 301, or 401, Judgment values are assigned so that normal change effects (predictive change effects: none) and special change effects (change predictive effects: success pattern) are determined at a rate of 70%. .

Also, if the final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new pending memory) is the red mode and the change pattern is none of the change patterns 101, 201, 301, or 401, the change As the effect type of the effect, a determination value is assigned so that the normal change effect (change precursor effect: none) is determined at a rate of 100%.

Also, the final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new pending memory) is a gold mode, and the change pattern is any one of the change patterns 101, 201, 301, or 401. In this case, as the type of change effect, the normal change effect (predictive change effect: none) is 10%, and the special change effect (change predictive effect: success pattern) is determined at a rate of 90%. ing.

Further, when the final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new pending memory) is the gold mode and the change pattern is none of the change patterns 101, 201, 301, or 401, the change As the effect type of the effect, a determination value is assigned so that the normal change effect (change precursor effect: none) is determined at a rate of 100%.

[Execution/non-execution determination table of pre-reading forewarning effect (R suspension effect) of change portent effect]
FIG. 9-16(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the execution/non-execution determination table for the R suspension effect. As shown in FIG. 9-16(B), in this embodiment, it is possible to decide whether or not to execute the R suspension effect (“no execution” or “with execution”). , are assigned judgment values.

As shown in FIG. 9-16 (B), determination values are assigned so that 50% of the decisions are made not to execute the R pending effect, and 50% of the decisions are made to execute the R pending effect. is

[Change effect]
In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a change effect based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The change effect is to display the corresponding display (suspended display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that was the determination target at the time of starting winning in either a blue mode, a red mode, or a gold mode, which is different from the normal mode. This is an example of the advance notice effect.

Specifically, among the change effects, the suspension change effect in which the display mode of the suspension display is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode (any display mode of blue mode, red mode, or gold mode) is executed. It is a pre-reading notice effect that suggests the display result of the reserved memory that is being reserved. In addition, among the change effects, the active change effect in which the display mode of the active display is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode (either the display mode of the blue mode or the red mode) is the display result of the executed variable display. It is a notice production during fluctuations that suggests. Further, in the present embodiment, as the change effect, a normal change effect having different effect modes and a special change effect can be executed.

[Normal change effect]
In this embodiment, a normal change effect can be executed as a change effect for changing the display mode of the pending display and the active display. The normal change effect is (i) the timing at which the n-th hold display corresponding to the start winning is displayed in the hold display area (timing at the start win), (ii) the hold display corresponding to the start win Timing when the change order in the display area shifts to a higher position (active display area side) (when n≧2), (iii) Timing when the pending display corresponding to the start winning shifts to the active display area (its start Timing at which the active display corresponding to the winning prize is displayed), or (iv) at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the special pattern (decorative pattern corresponding to this), the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning prize ( This is an effect that changes the suspended display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode.

<Production example of normal change production>
FIGS. 9-17 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect image and effect sound of each effect related to the normal change effect. In this example, an example is shown in which a normal change effect in which the active display changes to a blue mode is executed while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed in the normal state.

In the drawings of the present embodiment, for the sake of explanation of the example of the effect, the effect sounds reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R are shown below the image display device 5 for the sake of convenience. The actual positional relationship of each device (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R) in this embodiment is as shown in FIG. 8-1.

Further, these figures may show an example in which a specific effect sound is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R, but this is only a characteristic example in this embodiment. However, even if the illustration shows an example in which a specific effect sound is reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R, another effect sound different from the specific effect sound may be reproduced and output. Even if the illustration shows an example in which none of the effect sounds are reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R, any of the effect sounds may be reproduced and output. These are equally applicable in the following figures.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (1), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 controls the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns is started. At this time, the active display AC in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area ACE.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 does not reproduce and output any effect sound related to the normal change effect from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (2), the effect control CPU 120 executes the normal change effect, and changes the normal mode active display in the active display area ACE to the blue mode active display AC1.

[Change sign production]
In the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a change precursor effect that suggests that a special change effect may be executed. The change portent production includes a success pattern and a failure pattern. When the change portent performance of the success pattern is executed, the special change performance is executed, and when the change portent performance of the failure pattern is executed, none of the change performances is executed. Hereinafter, the change precursor effect of the success pattern is appropriately referred to as "change precursor effect (success pattern)" and "change precursor effect: success pattern", and the change precursor effect of the failure pattern is appropriately referred to as "change precursor effect (failure pattern). ”, “change portent effect: failure pattern”. The change portent effect is a series of effects composed of (1) to (3) shown below.

(1) Change sign production (first stage)
As shown in FIG. 9-18(1), the change portent effect (first stage) is a effect in which the active display is moved from the active display area to the center of the screen and displayed enlarged. The enlarged active enlarged display EAC at this time is appropriately referred to as "enlarged active display". At this time, the effect sound EA (success pattern) or the effect sound EB (failure pattern) is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this example, sound effects are reproduced and output. Regardless of whether the change portent effect is a success pattern or a failure pattern, the change portent effect (first stage) has a common effect mode.

(2) Change sign production (second stage)
As shown in FIG. 9-18 (2), the change portent effect (second stage) is a effect in which the characters "READY" are superimposed on the active enlarged display EAC in the center of the screen. At this time, the first sound effect E "ready" is reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R in both cases of the sound effect EA (success pattern) and the sound effect EB (failure pattern). Regardless of whether the change portent effect is a success pattern or a failure pattern, the change portent effect (second stage) has a common effect mode. The characters "READY" and the first effect sound E "READY" are information suggesting that it will be announced whether or not the special change effect will be executed from now on, and can give the player a sense of expectation. .

(3) Change sign production (third stage)
As shown in FIG. 9-18 (3A), the success pattern change precursor effect (third stage) is a effect in which the characters "GO" are superimposed on the active enlarged display EAC in the center of the screen. At this time, the second effect sound EA (scratch processing) and the third effect sound EA "gogogogo go" are reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIG. 9-20 (4)). The characters "GO", the second effect sound EA (scratch processing), and the third effect sound EA "gogogogo, go" are information for notifying the player that the special change effect is about to start. interest can be further improved.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 superimposes the characters "GO" on the center of the screen of the image display device 5 on the active enlarged display EAC in response to the reproduction output of the second effect sound EA and the third effect sound EA. . In this example, the second effect sound EA is reproduced four times and the third effect sound EA is reproduced once. It is superimposed.

Specifically, at the timing when the second sound effect EA (first time) is reproduced and output, the characters "GO" are displayed for the first time, and at the timing when the second sound effect EA (first time) is reproduced and output, " GO” ends. At the timing when the second sound effect EA (second time) is reproduced and output, the characters "GO" are displayed for the second time, and when the second sound effect EA (second time) is reproduced and output, the characters "GO" are displayed. Display ends. At the timing when the second sound effect EA (third time) is reproduced and output, the characters "GO" are displayed for the third time, and when the second sound effect EA (third time) is reproduced and output, the characters "GO" are displayed Display ends. At the timing when the second sound effect EA (fourth time) is reproduced and output, the characters "GO" are displayed for the fourth time, and at the timing when the second sound effect EA (fourth time) is reproduced and output, the characters "GO" are displayed. Display ends. Then, the characters "GO" are displayed for the fifth time at the timing of starting the reproduction output of the third effect sound EA, and the display of the characters "GO" ends at the timing of ending the reproduction output of the third effect sound EA.

As shown in FIG. 9-18 (3B), the failure pattern change precursor effect (third stage) is a effect in which the crack image CI is superimposed on the active enlarged display EAC over the entire screen. At this time, the second effect sound EB is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

[Special change effect]
In this embodiment, a special change effect can be executed as a change effect for changing the display mode of the pending display and the active display. The special change effect is executed after the change precursor effect (success pattern). The special change effect is a series of effects composed of the following first stage, second stage, and final stage.

(1) Special change production (first stage)
A route display, which is an object shaped like an arrow extending from the active display area toward the upper left portion of the screen, the center portion of the screen, and the upper right portion of the screen, is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 . Of the course displays, the course display that extends from the active display area toward the upper left of the screen is called the left course section, the course display that extends from the active display area toward the center of the screen is called the center course section, and the course display that extends from the active display area toward the upper right section of the screen. The track display that extends downward is called the right track portion.

Further, an active candidate display (eg, blue mode), which is a change candidate for the active display, is displayed beyond the left path portion, and an active candidate display (eg, red mode) is displayed beyond the right path portion. Further, at the end of the central course portion, "NEXT" notifies that the display mode of the active display is not notified at this stage and that the next stage (the stage where the active candidate display with a higher expectation of a big hit becomes a change candidate) will proceed. icon is displayed. When one of the course sections emits light, the player is informed of which course the player has taken. The mode of the course portion at this time is appropriately referred to as a "progress mode".

(first stage → final stage)
When proceeding to a route portion having an active candidate display ahead of the route portion, it is notified that the active display changes to the display mode of the active candidate display. Specifically, by changing the display mode of the active enlarged display to the display mode of the active candidate display, after emphasizing and notifying which display mode the active display changes to, the active enlarged display is changed to the normal size active display. and display it in the active display area, ending the special change effect.

(1st stage → 2nd stage)
In addition, when proceeding to a course section having a "NEXT" icon at the end of the course section, it is notified that the game advances to the second stage of the special change effect. Specifically, the "NEXT" icon is displayed in a manner surrounded by rectangular objects (hereinafter referred to as "surrounding manner" as appropriate) that informs that the player has proceeded to the "NEXT" icon.

(2) Special change production (second stage)
A route display is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 . The route display at this time consists only of the left route portion and the right route portion, and does not include the center route portion. An active candidate display (for example, a red mode) is displayed beyond the left track portion, and an active candidate display (for example, a gold mode) is displayed beyond the right track portion.

At this time, change candidates with higher expectations for big hits are displayed in the second stage than in the first stage. Specifically, in the first stage, the red mode and below (blue mode, red mode) were candidates for change, but in the second stage, the red mode and above (red mode, gold mode) were candidates for change. there is Also, since the "NEXT" icon is not displayed, the process does not proceed to the next step, and it is notified that the active display will change to one of the active candidate displays at this step.

(Second stage → final stage)
When any of the active candidate indications advances to the route portion, the active indication will be notified that the display mode of the active candidate indication will change. Specifically, by changing the display mode of the active enlarged display to the display mode of the active candidate display, after emphasizing and notifying which display mode the active display changes to, the active enlarged display is changed to the normal size active display. and display it in the active display area, ending the special change effect.

<Example of a series of productions from change sign production to special change production>
9-19 to 9-22 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images and effect sounds for each effect related to the special change effect. In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal state, a special change effect is executed in which the active display changes to a gold mode.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-19 (1), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 controls the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns is started. At this time, the active display AC in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area ACE.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 does not reproduce and output any effect sound related to the normal change effect from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 9-19(2) to 9-20(4), the effect control CPU 120 executes a change precursor effect (success pattern). 9-19(2) to 9-20(4) are the same as those in FIGS. 9-18(1) to 9-18(3A), so the explanation is omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-20 (5), the effect control CPU 120 executes a special change effect (first stage), displays the route display RI on the entire screen of the image display device 5, and displays the left route portion. A blue active candidate display CAC1, a center track portion, a "NEXT" icon, and a right track portion, a red active candidate display CAC2 are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-20 (6), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the special change effect (first stage), and changes the central route portion of the route display RI of the image display device 5 to the progress mode. , and the "NEXT" icon changes to a surrounding mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (7), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the special change effect (first stage) and executes the special change effect (second stage). The route display RI is continuously displayed on the entire screen, and the red active candidate display CAC2 is displayed at the left route portion, and the gold active candidate display CAC3 is displayed at the right route portion. At this time, the route display RI does not include the central route portion.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (8), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the special change effect (second stage), and changes the right track portion of the track display RI of the image display device 5 to the progress mode. change to

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (9), the effect control CPU 120 ends the special change effect (second stage), executes the special change effect (final stage), and displays the screen of the image display device 5. The active enlarged display EAC3 in the center is finally changed to the gold mode, which is the display mode of the active candidate display notified in the course display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-22 (10), the effect control CPU 120 ends the special change effect and causes the active display area ACE to display an active display AC3 in a gold mode corresponding to the display mode of the active enlarged display. .

[R hold effect]
In this embodiment, it is possible to execute the R suspension effect based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The R suspension effect is a type of foreseeing forewarning effect that notifies the execution of the change premonitory effect in the variable display that is the object of determination at the time of starting winning by displaying the display mode of the suspension display in the R mode. . In the present embodiment, when the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory that is the target of the R reserved presentation is executed, the change portent presentation (success pattern or failure pattern) is performed. The R-mode pending display is a mode in which the letter "R" is displayed in the normal mode pending display. When the R suspension performance is executed, the active display is displayed in the R mode until the change portent performance is executed when the variable display corresponding to the suspension memory which is the target of the R suspension performance is executed. be done.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined to execute the R suspension effect based on the determination result at the time of start winning, the suspension display is displayed in a normal mode from the time of start winning to the next hold shift, and the next hold shift is performed. The hold display is changed to the R mode at the timing. The pending display may be changed to the R mode at a timing different from the timing described above, without being limited to such a mode.

<Production example of R pending production>
FIG. 9-23 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image of each effect related to the R pending effect. In this example, an example is shown in which an R suspension effect is performed in which the suspension display changes to the R mode while the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed in the normal state.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (1), when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 causes the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 to display A combination of decorative symbols ("246" in this example) that results in "loss" is confirmed and stopped. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small patterns ("246" in this example) is confirmed and stopped.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 does not cause the active display area ACE to display the active display AC in response to the fact that the variable display is not currently being executed, and the first reserved display area PD1E in the normal mode. Three pending displays PD1 are displayed. Of these first pending displays PD1, the pending memory in which the variable display is performed thirdly is the announcement target (target) of the R pending effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120, based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, displays the image. In the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the device 5, the variable display of decorative patterns is started. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 newly displays the normal mode active display AC corresponding to the variable display currently being executed in the active display area ACE based on the fact that the first reserved memory number has become 2. , the first suspension display PD1 in the normal mode displayed in the first suspension display area PD1E is shifted one by one toward the active display area ACE. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 changes the first suspension display PD1R, which is an announcement target of the R suspension effect, to the R mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (3), when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 causes the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 to display The combination of decorative symbols ("132" in this example) that results in "loss" is determined and stopped. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small patterns ("132" in this example) is confirmed and stopped.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area ACE to erase the active display AC in response to the fact that the variable display is not being executed at present.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (4), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 displays the image based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. In the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the device 5, the variable display of decorative patterns is started. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 newly displays the normal mode active display AC corresponding to the variable display currently being executed in the active display area ACE based on the fact that the first reserved storage number becomes 1. , the R mode first suspension display PD1R displayed in the first suspension display area PD1E is shifted by one to the active display area ACE side.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (5), when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 causes the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 to display The combination of decorative symbols ("462" in this example) that results in "loss" is determined and stopped. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small patterns ("462" in this example) is confirmed and stopped.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area ACE to erase the active display AC in response to the fact that the variable display is not being executed at present.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (6), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120, based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, displays the image. In the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the device 5, the variable display of decorative patterns is started. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 newly displays the R-mode active display ACR corresponding to the variable display currently being executed in the active display area ACE based on the fact that the first reserved storage number has become 0. , erases the R mode first suspension display PD1R displayed in the first suspension display area PD1E.

[Production decision processing at the start of fluctuation]
When starting variable display of special symbols, the CPU 103 executes a display result designation command for designating a display result, a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern, and a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or the second reservation storage number subtraction designation command) to the effect control CPU 120.

The effect control CPU 120 issues a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved Memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command), display result designation command for designating the display result (jackpot, or hit, jackpot type in the case of a big hit, etc.), and the fluctuation time of the special symbol and Variation display of special symbols is executed based on the fact that a set of commands called a variation pattern specification command specifying the effect content (reach, pseudo-run, etc.) is received from the game control microcomputer 100, and , It is possible to specify the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the contents of the production (reach and pseudo consecutive etc.).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when the variable display of the special symbols is completed and the display result is determined, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100, special symbols (first special It is possible to specify that the variable display of the symbol (or the second special symbol) has ended and the display result has been derived.

9-24 and 9-25 are flow charts showing the effect determination process executed at the start of fluctuation. The effect control CPU 120 executes the variable start time effect determination process shown in FIGS. 9-24 and 9-25 in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-described one set of commands associated with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols is specified as a display result. A production control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the production) to be executed based on the command and the variation pattern designation command is set, and a decorative pattern based on the specified variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) during the variable display is determined by the effect determination process at the start of variation shown in FIGS. 9-24 and 9-25.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect mode is the normal mode (step S05TM2010). If the effect mode is not the normal mode (step S05TM2010: NO), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S05TM2170.

When the production mode is the normal mode (step S05TM2010: YES), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is a variation pattern with super reach (step S05TM2020). . When the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is a variation pattern without super reach (step S05TM2020: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is a variation pattern with super reach (step S05TM2020: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is "SP-A1" or It is determined whether or not the variation pattern accompanies any of "SP-A2" (step S05TM2030). If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is a variation pattern that does not accompany "SP-A1" or "SP-A2" (step S05TM2030: NO), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S05TM2070.

If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is a variation pattern with either "SP-A1" or "SP-A2" (step S05TM2030: YES), the effect control CPU 120 uses the display result specification command It is determined whether or not the designated display result is a "jackpot" (step S05TM2040). If the display result designated by the display result designation command is not a "big hit" (step S05TM2040: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

If the display result designated by the display result designation command is a "jackpot" (step S05TM2040: YES), the effect control CPU 120 is. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is not a variation pattern with "SP-A1" (step S05TM2050: NO), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S05TM2260.

If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is a variation pattern with "SP-A1" (step S05TM2050: YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs a first normal jackpot notification effect (see FIG. 9-32 and FIG. 9-33) (step S05TM2060), and the process ends.

After step S05TM2030: NO, it is decided to execute an SP branch effect (see FIG. 9-27 (4) mountain) described later (step S05TM2070), and the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is "SP-B1 ” or “SP-B2” (step S05TM2080). If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is a variation pattern that does not accompany "SP-B1" or "SP-B2" (step S05TM2080: NO), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S05TM2130.

If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is a variation pattern with either "SP-B1" or "SP-B2" (step S05TM2080: YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs a CU effect described later ( 9-31) is executed or not is determined based on the table (see FIG. 9-26 (A)) for determining whether or not the CU effect is executed (step S05TM2090), and specified by the display result designation command It is determined whether or not the display result is a "big hit" (step S05TM2100). If the display result designated by the display result designation command is not "big win" (step S05TM2100: NO), effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the display result specified by the display result specifying command is "big hit" (step S05TM2100: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specifying command is a variation pattern with "SP-B1". (step S05TM2110). If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is a variation pattern without "SP-B1" (step S05TM2110: NO), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S05TM2260.

If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is a variation pattern with "SP-B1" (step S05TM2110: YES), the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the second normal jackpot notification effect. (Step S05TM2120), the process is terminated as it is.

After step S05TM2080: NO, the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute a story SP development effect (see FIGS. 9-28 to 9-30) (step S05TM2130), which is specified by the display result specifying command. It is determined whether or not the displayed result is a "big hit" (step S05TM2140). If the display result designated by the display result designation command is not a "big win" (step S05TM2140: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the display result specified by the display result specifying command is "big hit" (step S05TM2140: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specifying command is a variation pattern with "SP-C1". (step S05TM2150). If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is a variation pattern without "SP-C1" (step S05TM2150: NO), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S05TM2260.

If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is a variation pattern with "SP-C1" (step S05TM2150: YES), the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the third normal jackpot notification effect. (Step S05TM2160), the process is terminated as it is.

After step S05TM2010: NO, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect mode is the rush mode (step S05TM2170). If the effect mode is not the rush mode (step S05TM2170: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

If the production mode is the rush mode (step S05TM2170: YES), the production control CPU 120 determines that the production mode is the rush mode described later: dream dream mode (see FIGS. 9-59 (1), (2A), and (3A)). (step S05TM2180). If the effect mode is not the rush mode: Yume Yume mode (step S05TM2180: NO), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S05TM2210.

If the production mode is rush mode: dream dream mode (step S05TM2180: YES), production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display result designated by the display result designation command is a "big hit" (step S05TM2190). ). If the display result designated by the display result designation command is not "big hit" (step S05TM2190: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the display result designated by the display result designation command is a "big hit" (step S05TM2190: YES), the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect mode of the big hit notification effect when hitting to the right in the dream mode to the right in the dream mode. A determination is made based on the table (see FIG. 9-26 (B1)) for determining the effect mode of the big hit notification effect at the time of hitting, and the process ends as it is.

After step S05TM2180: NO, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect mode is a rush mode to be described later: Nana mode (see FIGS. 9-59 (1), (2B), and (3B)) (step S05TM2210). If the effect mode is not rush mode: Nana mode (step S05TM2210: NO), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S05TM2235.

If the effect mode is rush mode: Nana mode (step S05TM2210: YES), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display result designated by the display result designation command is a "big hit" (step S05TM2220). If the display result designated by the display result designation command is not a "big hit" (step S05TM2220: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

If the display result designated by the display result designation command is a "big hit" (step S05TM2220: YES), the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect mode of the right-hand hitting big win notification effect in the Nana mode to the right-hand hitting big win notification effect in the Nana mode. It is determined based on the table (see FIG. 9-26 (B2)) for determining the effect mode of the effect, and the process ends as it is.

After step S05TM2210: NO (that is, when the production mode is a rush mode to be described later: jam mode (see FIGS. 9-59 (1), (2C), and (3C))), the production control CPU 120 enters the production mode is rush mode: jam mode (step S05TM2235), and it is determined whether or not the display result designated by the display result designation command is a "big hit" (step S05TM2240). If the display result designated by the display result designation command is not "big win" (step S05TM2240: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "big hit" (step S05TM2240: YES), the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect mode of the right hit in jam mode to the right hit in jam mode. It is determined based on the table (see FIG. 9-26 (B3)) for determining the effect mode of the big hit notification effect (step S05TM2250), and the process ends as it is.

In addition, after step S05TM2050: NO, step S05TM2110: NO, or step S05TM2150: NO, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute a revival effect (step S05TM2260), and ends the process.

[Tables referenced in the process of determining the effect at the start of fluctuation]
FIG. 9-26 is a specific example of a table that is referred to in any process of the effect determination process at the time of fluctuation start. FIG. 9-26(A) is an example of a CU effect execution/non-execution determination table referred to when determining whether or not a CU effect is to be executed in step S05TM2090. Fig. 9-26 (B1) is referred to in step S05TM2200 when determining the effect mode of right-handed hit big hit notification effect for Yume Yume mode. It is an example of a table. FIG. 9-26(B2) is an example of a presentation mode determination table for [for Nana mode] right-handed hit big hit notification presentation that is referred to when determining the presentation mode of the right hit jackpot notification presentation for Nana mode in step S05TM2230. be. FIG. 9-26(B3) shows the [for jam mode] right-hand hit jackpot notification effect effect mode determination table that is referred to when determining the effect mode of the right-hand hit jackpot notification effect for the jam mode in step S05TM2250. An example.

<Determination table for execution/non-execution of CU effect>
FIG. 9-26(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the execution/non-execution determination table for the CU effect. As shown in FIG. 9-26(A), in this embodiment, determination values are assigned so that the execution ratio of the CU effect differs depending on whether the display result is "loss" or "big hit". is

If the display result is "missing" (that is, if the display result specified by the display result specifying command is "missing"), it is decided not to execute the CU effect at a rate of 90%, and 10%. It decides to execute the CU performance at a rate.

Further, when the display result is a "big hit" (that is, when the display result designated by the display result designation command is a "big hit"), it is determined not to execute the CU effect at a rate of 30%; It is decided to execute the CU effect at a rate of %.

In this way, the execution ratio of the CU effect is higher when the display result is "big win" than when the display result is "loss". can indicate to the player that is high volatility.

<[For Yume Yume Mode] Effect Mode Determination Table for Right-Hit Hit Notification Effect>
FIG. 9-26(B1) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode determination table for the [dream dream mode] jackpot notification effect when hitting right. As shown in FIG. 9-26 (B1), in this embodiment, selection of the effect mode of the right-handed hit notification effect is made according to whether the big win type is "3R big win" or "10R big win". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio is different.

When the jackpot type is "3R jackpot" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is "symbol 3R short-time jackpot" or "3R short-time jackpot via small hit"), at a rate of 100% It is decided to execute a jackpot effect (see FIG. 9-70) at the time of hitting the first right, which will be described later.

If the jackpot type is "10R jackpot" (that is, if the display result specified by the display result designation command is "symbol 10R short-time jackpot" or "10R short-time jackpot via small hit"), at a rate of 50% It is decided to execute the first right-hand hitting big hit effect, and it is decided to execute the first right-hand hitting special big hit effect (see FIG. 9-71), which will be described later, at a rate of 50%.

In this way, only when the jackpot type is "10R jackpot", the special jackpot notification performance at the time of the first right-handed hit can be executed, so at the timing when the special jackpot notification performance at the time of the first right-handed hit is executed, that is, the jackpot. Before the type notification effect is executed, the player can recognize that the "10R jackpot" will occur due to the variation.

<[For Nana Mode] Effect Mode Determination Table for Right-Hit Jackpot Notification Effect>
FIG. 9-26 (B2) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode determination table for the [for Nana mode] right-hand hit big hit notification effect. As shown in FIG. 9-26 (B2), in this embodiment, selection of the effect mode of the right-handed hit notification effect is made according to whether the big win type is "3R big win" or "10R big win". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio is different.

When the jackpot type is "3R jackpot" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is "symbol 3R short-time jackpot" or "3R short-time jackpot via small hit"), at a rate of 100% It is decided to execute a big hit effect (see FIG. 9-72) at the time of hitting the second right, which will be described later.

If the jackpot type is "10R jackpot" (that is, if the display result specified by the display result designation command is "symbol 10R short-time jackpot" or "10R short-time jackpot via small hit"), at a rate of 50% It is decided to execute the second hit to the right big hit effect, and it is decided to execute the later-described second right hit special big hit effect (see FIG. 9-73) at a rate of 50%.

In this way, only when the jackpot type is "10R jackpot", the special jackpot notification performance can be executed at the time of the second hitting to the right, that is, at the timing when the special jackpot reporting performance at the time of the second hitting to the right is executed, that is, the jackpot. Before the type notification effect is executed, the player can recognize that the "10R jackpot" will occur due to the variation.

<[For Jam Mode] Effect Mode Determination Table for Right-Hand Hit Notification Effect>
FIG. 9-26 (B3) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode determination table for the [jam mode] right-hand hit big hit notification effect. As shown in FIG. 9-26 (B3), in this embodiment, selection of the effect mode of the right-handed hit notification effect is made according to whether the big win type is "3R big win" or "10R big win". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio is different.

When the jackpot type is "3R jackpot" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is "symbol 3R short-time jackpot" or "3R short-time jackpot via small hit"), at a rate of 100% It is determined to execute a third hit-to-right jackpot effect (see FIG. 9-74), which will be described later.

If the jackpot type is "10R jackpot" (that is, if the display result specified by the display result designation command is "symbol 10R short-time jackpot" or "10R short-time jackpot via small hit"), at a rate of 50% It is determined to execute the third hit to the right big hit effect, and it is decided to execute the third right hit special big hit effect (see FIG. 9-75) to be described later at a rate of 50%.

In this way, only when the jackpot type is "10R jackpot", the third right-handed special big-hit notification performance can be executed, so that at the timing when the third right-handed special big-hit notification performance is executed, that is, the big hit. Before the type notification effect is executed, the player can recognize that the "10R jackpot" will occur due to the variation.

[Development flow of SP reach production]
Next, the development flow of the SP ready-to-win effect in the present embodiment (hereinafter referred to as "SP development flow" as appropriate) will be described. The example of the SP development flow shown in FIG. 9-27 shows a flow that develops into a challenge SP, a flow that develops into a battle SP, and a flow that develops into a story SP after the ready-to-reach state is established.

In this state, the flow advances to the challenge SP shown in FIGS. 9-27(2) and (3), or the flow advances to the battle SP or story SP shown in FIGS. 9-27(4) and after.

As shown in FIG. 9-27 (1), at the timing when the ready-to-win state should be established in the variation pattern with various super-to-win, the effect control CPU 120 displays "2 ” is displayed in a stationary state, and characters of ``reach'' are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5.例文帳に追加At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to variably display the small patterns. Also, in the active display area ACE, an active display AC in a normal mode is displayed.

(Flow that develops into Challenge SP)
As shown in FIG. 9-27 (2), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variation pattern involving the challenge SP should be temporarily stopped, the effect control CPU 120 causes the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 to A combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "232") suggesting "lost" is temporarily stopped and displayed.

At this time, based on the fact that the CPU 103 continues to perform the variable display of the special symbols, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. . Further, the active display AC in the normal mode is continuously displayed in the active display area ACE.

As shown in FIG. 9-27 (3), at the timing when the variation pattern with the challenge SP should be developed into super reach, the effect control CPU 120 executes the challenge SP effect, and displays the challenge SP start screen on the image display device 5. Show AI. The challenge SP start screen AI is an image including a rock image and characters "Nana Challenge".

(Flow that develops into Battle SP or Story SP)
As shown in FIG. 9-27 (2), after establishing a ready-to-reach state in a variation pattern involving a battle SP or a story SP, the effect control CPU 120 executes an SP branch effect, and sends the SP to the image display device 5. Display the branch screen DI. The SP branch screen DI is an image including effect display.

The SP branch effect is an effect that encourages which super reach to develop by displaying the SP branch screen DI before developing to either the battle SP or the story SP to the super reach.

(Flow that develops into Battle SP)
As shown in FIG. 9-27 (5), after the SP branch effect in the variation pattern involving the battle SP is executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the battle SP development effect, and displays the battle SP on the image display device 5. Display the development screen BDI. The battle SP development screen BDI is an image including an effect display and the characters "Battle".

As shown in FIG. 9-27 (6), at the timing when the variation pattern involving the battle SP should develop into super reach, the effect control CPU 120 executes the battle SP effect, and displays the battle SP start screen on the image display device 5. Display BSI. The battle SP start screen BSI is an image including the character A, the enemy character X, and the characters "Battle".

(Flow that develops into Story SP)
As shown in FIG. 9-27(7), after the SP branch effect in the variation pattern involving the story SP is executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the story SP development effect, and displays the story SP on the image display device 5. Display the development screen SDI. The story SP development screen SDI is an image including effect display and character A. FIG. The details of the story SP development rendering will be described later with reference to FIGS. 9-28 to 9-30.

As shown in FIG. 9-27 (8), at the timing to develop super reach in the variation pattern with story SP, the effect control CPU 120 executes the story SP effect, and displays the story SP start screen on the image display device 5. Display SSI. The story SP start screen SSI is an image including a story title display (in this example, “Yume Yume-chan Story”).

[Story SP development production]
In this embodiment, in the variation pattern involving the story SP, the story SP development effect can be executed after the SP branch effect. The story SP development effect is a series of effects composed of (1) to (4) shown below.

(1) Story SP development production (first stage)
In the story SP development production (first stage), the character A is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 together with effect display. The character A at this time is displayed in normal character colors (for example, the hair is green, the skin is skin color, and the cloak is red). At this time, the sound effect G [the first sound effect G and the second sound effect G] “powerful” is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

(2) Story SP development production (second stage)
In the story SP development effect (second stage), the blackout image BOI is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 . At this time, the effect sound G is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R, but the mute processing is being executed.

In addition to the above embodiment, when the story SP development effects (first stage), (third stage), and (fourth stage) are executed, the effect sounds reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R While the G channel setting ratio is set to 100%, the channel setting ratio of the production sound G reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R is set to 20% when the story SP development production (second stage) is executed. As a result, the clarity of the effect sound G in the story SP development effect (second stage) may be reduced.

(3) Story SP development production (third stage)
In the story SP development production (third stage), the character A is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 together with the effect display. At this time, the display color of the entire character A is yellow. Also, the effect sound G [first effect sound G] "pa" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Subsequently, the character A is continuously displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 together with the effect display. At this time, the display color of the character A as a whole changes from yellow to purple, which is in a complementary color contrast relationship with yellow. Also, the effect sound G [first effect sound G] "p" is reproduced and output continuously from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Subsequently, the character A is continuously displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 together with the effect display. At this time, the display color of character A as a whole changes from purple to yellow, which is in a complementary color contrast relationship with purple. Also, the effect sound G [first effect sound G] "p" is reproduced and output continuously from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Subsequently, the character A is continuously displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 together with the effect display. At this time, the display color of the character A as a whole changes from yellow to purple, which is in a complementary color contrast relationship with yellow. Also, the effect sound G [first effect sound G] "p" is reproduced and output continuously from the speakers 8L and 8R.

(4) Story SP development production (fourth stage)
In the story SP development effect (fourth stage), the enlarged character A is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 together with the effect display. The display color of the character A at this time is the normal character color. At this time, the sound effect G [the first sound effect G and the second sound effect G] “powerful” is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the story SP development effect (third stage and fourth stage), after executing the scratch processing and reproducing and outputting the first effect sound G "pa" from the speakers 8L and 8R four times in a row, The 1st effect sound G and the 2nd effect sound G "powerful" are reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Also, each time the yellow character A and the purple character A are alternately displayed on the image display device 5, the first effect sound G "pa" is scratched and reproduced four times consecutively from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is

As shown in FIG. 9-4, in the variation pattern with super reach, the relationship of variation pattern with challenge SP<variation pattern with story SP has a high expectation for a big hit, so after the SP branch production A development route with a higher expectation for a big hit is obtained in the case of developing into a story SP after the SP branch effect than in the case of developing into a battle SP. That is, the development route with a higher expectation for big win is obtained when the story SP development effect is executed after the SP branch effect than when the battle SP development effect is executed after the SP branch effect. In this way, the story SP development effect is a kind of change-in-prediction effect for informing that the ready-to-win effect will develop into a super ready-to-win with the highest expectation for a big hit.

In the above-described embodiment, in the story SP development effect, two types of characters A, yellow character A and purple character A, are alternately displayed. In the SP development effect, the character A may be displayed in different display modes from the two types of characters A, namely, the character A in yellow and the character A in purple.

For example, in the story SP development effect, three types of characters A, a yellow character A, a red character A, and a blue character A, may be displayed in order.

In the above-described embodiment, when two types of characters A, yellow character A and purple character A, are alternately displayed in the story SP development effect, the display size of character A is the same. However, not limited to such a form, when two types of characters A, a yellow character A and a purple character A, are alternately displayed in the story SP development effect, the display size of the character A is not common. may

For example, in the story SP development effect, when two types of characters A, a yellow character A and a purple character A, are alternately displayed, the display size of the yellow character A is small and the display size of the purple character A is large. It can be big.

In the story SP development effect, an example was shown in which two types of characters A, a yellow character A and a purple character A, are alternately displayed, and the display pose of the character A is common. Regardless of the form, when two types of characters A, a yellow character A and a purple character A, are alternately displayed in the story SP development effect, the display poses of the character A may not be common.

At this time, when the characters are alternately displayed in the story SP development effect, it is possible to display the characters in different display poses. It is assumed that different types of characters cannot be displayed.

<Production example of story SP development production>
9-28 to 9-30 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images and effect sounds for each effect related to the story SP development effect. This example shows an example in which the story SP development effect is executed while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed in the normal state.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-28 (1), at the timing to start the story SP development effect after the SP branch effect in the variation pattern is executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the story SP development effect (first stage) to display the story SP development screen SDI on the image display device 5 . The story SP development screen SDI is an image including effect display and character A. FIG. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the character (A) in normal character colors (for example, green for hair, skin color for skin, red for cloak, etc.). Also, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the effect sound G [the first effect sound G and the second effect sound G] "powerful" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG. At this time, the active display AC in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area ACE.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-28 (2), the effect control CPU 120 executes the story SP development effect (second stage) at the timing to start the story SP development effect (second stage) in the variation pattern. Then, the blackout image BOI is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 . At this time, the effect control CPU 120 is executing a mute process while reproducing and outputting the effect sound G from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-28(3), the effect control CPU 120 executes the story SP development effect (third step) at the timing when the story SP development effect (third step) in the variation pattern should be started. Then, the blackout image BOI is erased from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and the character (A) CA is displayed together with the effect display EFI. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the entire character (A) to be displayed in yellow. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the effect sound G [first effect sound G] "pa" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-29 (4), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the story SP development effect (third stage), and continues to display the character (A) CA together with the effect display EFI. Let At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the entire character (A) to be displayed in a purple display color that is in a complementary color contrast relationship with yellow. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously reproduces and outputs the effect sound G [first effect sound G] "pa" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-29 (5), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the story SP development effect (third stage), and continues to display the character (A) CA together with the effect display EFI. Let At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the entire character (A) to be displayed in yellow, which is in a complementary color contrast relationship with purple. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously reproduces and outputs the effect sound G [first effect sound G] "pa" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-29 (6), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the story SP development effect (third stage), and continues to display the character (A) CA together with the effect display EFI. Let At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the entire character (A) to be displayed in a purple display color that is in a complementary color contrast relationship with yellow. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously reproduces and outputs the effect sound G [first effect sound G] "pa" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-30 (7), the effect control CPU 120 executes the story SP development effect (fourth step) at the timing to start the story SP development effect (fourth step) in the variation pattern. Then, the enlarged character (A) CA is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 together with the effect display EFI. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the character (A) in the normal character color. Also, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the effect sound G [the first effect sound G and the second effect sound G] "powerful" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-30 (8), at the timing when the variation pattern should develop to super reach, the effect control CPU 120 executes the story SP effect, and displays the story SP start screen SSI on the image display device 5. display. The story SP start screen SSI is an image including a story title display (in this example, “Yume Yume-chan Story”).

In this way, as shown in FIGS. 9-28(3) to 9-29(6), when the story SP development effect is executed, the character A whose display color is yellow and the display color of yellow and complementary colors are contrasted. Each time the related purple character A is displayed, the scratching process of scratching the first effect sound G "pa" four times is executed, and the effect sound G is reproduced and output.

[CU direction]
In the present embodiment, in the battle SP production, the period from the start of the battle SP production to the timing of the winning/losing branch is referred to as the "first half of the battle SP", and the period from the timing of the winning/losing branch to the end of the battle SP production. It is called "the second half of the battle SP". In the present embodiment, at a timing (predetermined timing in the first half of the battle SP) before the display result is announced while the battle SP effect is being executed, it is suggested that the variation display has a high degree of expectation for a big hit. It is possible to execute a CU effect that The CU effect is a effect in which the movable body YM moves from the initial position to the second motion position on the battle start screen in the battle SP effect. At this time, the effect sound B is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Below, the CU effect is appropriately referred to as a "first movable body effect".

<Production example of CU production>
FIG. 9-31 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image and effect sound for each effect related to the CU effect. This example shows an example in which the CU effect is executed while the battle SP effect is being executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (1), at the timing to develop super reach (battle SP) in the variation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 executes the battle SP effect, and displays the battle SP on the image display device 5. Display the start screen BSI. The battle SP start screen BSI is an image including a character (A) CA, an enemy character (X) CX, and the characters "Battle".

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (2), at the timing when the CU effect should be executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the CU effect and moves the movable body YM from the initial position to the second motion position. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the effect sound B from the speakers 8L and 8R.

When the movable body YM is at the second operation position, the image display device 5 is positioned behind the movable body YM (on the side of the game machine). The visibility of the related effect image is lowered.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (3), at the timing when the CU effect should end, the effect control CPU 120 ends the CU effect and moves the movable body YM from the second motion position to the initial position. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the display of the battle SP start screen BSI on the image display device 5, and causes the screen during battle BEI to be displayed. The in-battle screen is an image including a character (A) CA and an enemy character (X) CX.

[Big hit notification effect]
In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a big hit notification effect for notifying that the display result will be a "big hit" in the variable display. In this embodiment, as the jackpot notification effects, there are a normal jackpot notification effect that can be executed in the normal mode and a right-hand hit jackpot notification effect that can be executed in the rush mode.

[Normal jackpot notification effect]
In this embodiment, the normal jackpot notification effects include a first normal jackpot notification effect, a second normal jackpot notification effect, and a third normal jackpot notification effect.

[First normal jackpot notification effect]
The first normal jackpot notification performance is a kind of jackpot notification performance executed when notifying the display result when the performance mode is the normal mode and the variation pattern is ``SP-A1 jackpot''. The first normal jackpot notification effect is a effect included in the success effect. The first normal jackpot notification effect informs that the challenge is successful (that is, the display result becomes "big hit") at a predetermined opportunity (operation of the push button 31B, elapse of a predetermined period, etc.) during the challenge SP. A success notification screen is displayed on the image display device 5 . The success notification screen is an image including the characters "big win" and the characters "COMPLETE". On the success notification screen, the display color of white and the display color of black, which is in a complementary color contrast relationship with white, are alternately switched for display.

In the first normal jackpot notification effect, scratch processing is executed to reproduce and output the first effect sound C1 "ko" from the speakers 8L and 8R four times in succession, followed by the first effect sound C1 and the second effect sound C1. "Complete" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, every time the display color of the success notification screen is switched between white and black, the first effect sound C1 is scratched and reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIGS. 9-32 and 9-33). ), and the effect sound C1 is reproduced and output as "ko, ko, ko, ko, complete".

<Production example of the first normal jackpot notification production>
FIGS. 9-32 and 9-33 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images and effect sounds of respective effects related to the first normal jackpot notification effect. This example shows an example in which the first normal jackpot notification effect is executed while the challenge SP effect is being executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-32 (1), at the timing when the operation promotion display in the variation pattern should be displayed, the effect control CPU 120 displays the operation unit (in this example, push An operation prompting display BT prompting the player to operate the button 31B) is displayed.

In this example, the operation prompting display BT includes the characters "Press!!" It is formed by adding a time bar indicating the validity period. Here, since the smoke image SMI is displayed in the background of the operation prompting display BT, the player operates the operation unit expecting that the smoke will clear and the challenge will be successful.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the effect sound I2 "press" (character B voice) from the speakers 8L and 8R. Since the challenge SP effect being executed is a effect in which the character (B) mainly appears, the effect sound when the operation prompting display is displayed is the effect sound related to the character (B) (the effect sound of the character (B)). character voice).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-32 (2), when the player operates the operation unit, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first normal jackpot notification effect (success effect), and the image display device 5 succeeds. A notification screen SNI1 (in this example, an image including the characters "big hit" and the characters "COMPLETE") is displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the success notification screen SNI to be displayed in black. Also, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the first effect sound C1 "ko" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-32 (3), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the first normal jackpot notification effect (success effect), and the image display device 5 displays the success notification screen SNI2 (this example Then, an image containing the characters "big win" and the characters "COMPLETE") is displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the success notification screen SNI in white, which is in a complementary color contrast relationship with black. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continuously reproduces and outputs the first effect sound C1 "ko" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-33 (4), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the first normal jackpot notification effect (success effect), and the image display device 5 displays the success notification screen SNI1 (this example Then, an image containing the characters "big win" and the characters "COMPLETE") is displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the success notification screen SNI to be displayed in black, which is in a complementary color contrast relationship with white. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continuously reproduces and outputs the first effect sound C1 "ko" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-33 (5), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the first normal jackpot notification effect (success effect), and the image display device 5 displays the success notification screen SNI2 (this example Then, an image containing the characters "big win" and the characters "COMPLETE") is displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the success notification screen SNI in white, which is in a complementary color contrast relationship with black. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continuously reproduces and outputs the first effect sound C1 "ko" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-33 (6), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the first normal jackpot notification effect (success effect), and the image display device 5 displays the success notification screen SNI1 (this example Then, an image containing the characters "big win" and the characters "COMPLETE") is displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the first effect sound C1 and the second effect sound C1 "complete" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Thus, as shown in FIGS. 9-32 (2) to 9-33 (5), when the first normal jackpot notification effect is executed and the effect sound C1 is reproduced and output, the first effect sound A scratch process is being executed to scratch C1 "ko" four times.

[Second normal jackpot notification effect]
The second normal big win notification performance is a kind of big win notification performance executed when notifying the display result when the performance mode is the normal mode and the variation pattern is ``SP-B1 big win''. The second normal jackpot notification effect is a effect included in the win effect. The second normal jackpot notification effect indicates that the battle has been won (that is, the display result is "big hit") at a predetermined opportunity (operation of the push button 31B, passage of a predetermined period, etc.) during the second half of the battle SP. A victory notification screen to be notified is displayed on the image display device 5 . The victory notification screen is an image containing the characters "Victory", the character (A), and a combination of decorative symbols indicating a big hit. In this embodiment. In the second normal jackpot notification effect, the victory notification screen and the blackout image are alternately switched and displayed.

In the second normal jackpot notification effect, scratch processing is executed to reproduce and output the first effect sound C2 "V" from the speakers 8L and 8R four times in succession, followed by the first effect sound C2 and the second effect sound C2. "Victory" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, every time the victory notification screen is displayed, the first effect sound C2 is scratched and reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIGS. 9-34 to 9-37). is reproduced and output as "Vi, Vi, Vi, Vi, Victory".

In addition, in the second normal jackpot notification effect, the movable body YM moves from the initial position to the second operating position. When starting the second normal jackpot notification performance, the movable body YM moves from the initial position to the second operation position, and when ending the second normal jackpot notification performance, the movable body YM moves from the second operation position. Move to the initial position.

<Production example of second normal jackpot notification production>
9-34 to 9-37 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images and effect sounds of respective effects related to the second normal jackpot notification effect. This example shows an example in which the second normal jackpot notification effect is executed while the battle SP effect is being executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-34 (1), at the timing when the operation prompting display in the variation pattern should be displayed, the effect control CPU 120 displays the operation unit (in this example, push An operation prompting display BT prompting the player to operate the button 31B) is displayed.

In this example, the operation prompting display BT includes the characters "Press!!" It is formed by adding a time bar indicating the validity period. Here, since the friendly character (A) CA and the enemy character (X) CX are displayed in the background of the operation promotion display BT, the player can change the friendly character (A) to the enemy character by operating the operation unit. Operate the operation unit expecting to win against (X).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the effect sound I1 "press" (character A voice) from the speakers 8L and 8R. Since the battle SP effect being executed is a effect in which the character (A) mainly appears, the effect sound when the operation prompting display is displayed is the effect sound related to the character (A) (the effect sound of the character (A)). character voice).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-34 (2), when the player operates the operation unit, the effect control CPU 120 executes the second normal jackpot notification effect (win effect), and the image display device 5 wins. A notification screen WNI (in this example, an image including a combination of the characters "Victory", the character (A), and a decorative pattern indicating a big win) is displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the first effect sound C2 "Vi" from the speakers 8L and 8R. Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 moves the movable body YM from the initial position to the second motion position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-34 (3), the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the second normal jackpot notification effect (winning effect), and causes the image display device 5 to display the blackout image BOI. . At this time, the effect control CPU 120 is reproducing and outputting the first effect sound C1 "V" from the speakers 8L and 8R, but is executing mute processing. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continues to position the movable body YM at the second action position.

9-34(4) to 9-36(9) are the same as those in FIGS. 9-34(2) and 9-34(3), so description thereof will be omitted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-34 (3), the period during which the first blackout image BOI is displayed in the second normal jackpot notification effect (hereinafter referred to as "blackout period" as appropriate) is 0.5. 5S, and as shown in FIG. 9-35(5), the period during which the second blackout image BOI is displayed in the second normal jackpot notification effect is 0.4S, and FIG. 9-36(7). , the period during which the third blackout image BOI is displayed in the second normal jackpot notification effect is 0.3S, and as shown in FIG. 9-36 (9), the second normal jackpot notification The period during which the blackout image BOI is displayed for the fourth time in the effect is 0.2S.

Thus, by gradually shortening the blackout period, that is, by shortening the period until the first effect sound C2 "V" is reproduced and output, the entertainment of the second normal jackpot notification performance is improved. can.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (10), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the second normal jackpot notification effect (victory effect), and the image display device 5 displays the victory notification screen WNI (this example Then, an image including the characters "Victory", the character (A), and a combination of decorative patterns indicating a big hit is displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the first effect sound C2 and the second effect sound C2 "Victory" from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continues to position the movable body YM at the second action position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (11), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the second normal jackpot notification effect (victory effect), and the image display device 5 displays the victory notification screen WNI (this example Then, an image including the characters "Victory", the character (A), and a combination of decorative patterns indicating a big hit is displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 moves the movable body YM from the second motion position to the initial position.

[Third normal jackpot notification effect]
The third normal big win notification performance is a kind of big win notification performance executed when notifying the display result when the performance mode is the normal mode and the variation pattern is ``SP-C1 big win''. The third normal jackpot notification effect is a effect included in the achievement effect. The third normal jackpot notification effect informs that the story has been completed (that is, the display result is "big hit") at a predetermined opportunity (operation of the push button 31B, passage of a predetermined period, etc.) during the story SP. An achievement notification screen is displayed on the image display device 5 . The achievement notification screen is an image including characters "Configurations" and characters (A) to (C). In this embodiment. In the third normal jackpot notification effect, the achievement notification screen and the blackout image are alternately switched and displayed.

In the third normal jackpot notification performance, scratch processing is executed to reproduce and output the first performance sound C3 "ko" from the speakers 8L and 8R four times in succession, followed by the first performance sound C3 and the second performance sound C3. "Graturation" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, every time the achievement notification screen is displayed, the first effect sound C3 is scratched and reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIGS. 9-38 to 9-41). is played back as "Ko-Ko-Ko-Ko-Congratulation".

In addition, in the third normal jackpot notification effect, the movable body YM moves from the initial position to the second operating position. The movable body YM moves from the initial position to the second operating position when starting the third normal jackpot notification performance, and the movable body YM moves from the second operating position when ending the third normal jackpot notification performance. Move to the initial position.

<Production example of the third normal jackpot notification production>
9-38 to 9-41 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images and effect sounds of respective effects related to the third normal jackpot notification effect. This example shows an example in which the third normal jackpot notification effect is executed while the story SP effect is being executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-38 (1), at the timing when the operation prompting display in the variation pattern should be displayed, the effect control CPU 120 displays the operation unit (in this example, push An operation prompting display BT prompting the player to operate the button 31B) is displayed. At this time, the swirl effect display UEFI centered on the operation promotion display BT is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, and the title of the story SP is displayed on the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, " Yume-chan Story") is displayed.

In this example, the operation prompting display BT includes the characters "Press!!" It is formed by adding a time bar indicating the validity period. Here, since the swirl effect display UEFI for temporarily interrupting the story image is displayed in the background of the operation promotion display BT, the player operates the operation unit expecting that the story will be completed by operating the operation unit. Manipulate.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the effect sound I4 "press" (three voices of characters A to C) from the speakers 8L and 8R. The story SP effect being executed is a effect in which character (A) mainly appears, and characters (B) and (C) also appear. A), character (B), and character (C) are related to the production sound (three character voices of character (A), character (B), and character (C)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-38 (2), when the player operates the operation unit, the effect control CPU 120 executes the third normal jackpot notification effect (achievement effect), and the image display device 5 A notification screen ANI (in this example, an image including the characters "Configurations" and characters (A) to (C)) is displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the first effect sound C3 "ko" from the speakers 8L and 8R. Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 moves the movable body YM from the initial position to the second motion position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-38 (3), the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the third normal jackpot notification effect (achievement effect), and causes the image display device 5 to display the blackout image BOI. . At this time, the effect control CPU 120 is reproducing and outputting the first effect sound C3 "ko" from the speakers 8L and 8R, but is executing mute processing. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continues to position the movable body YM at the second action position.

9-38(4) to 9-40(9) are the same as those in FIGS. 9-38(2) and 9-38(3), so descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-38 (3), the blackout period in the third normal jackpot notification effect is 0.5S, and as shown in FIG. 9-39 (5), the third normal jackpot notification The blackout period in the production is 0.4S, and as shown in FIG. 9-40 (7), the blackout period in the third normal jackpot notification production is 0.3S, and is shown in FIG. As shown, the fourth blackout period in the third normal jackpot notification effect is 0.2S.

Thus, by gradually shortening the blackout period, that is, by shortening the period until the first effect sound C3 "ko" is reproduced and output, the interest of the third normal jackpot notification performance is improved. can.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (10), the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the third normal jackpot notification effect (achievement effect), and causes the image display device 5 to display the achievement notification screen ANI. . At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the first effect sound C3 and the second effect sound C3 "Complete" from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continues to position the movable body YM at the second action position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (11), the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the third normal jackpot notification effect (victory effect), and causes the image display device 5 to display the achievement notification screen ANI. . At this time, the effect control CPU 120 moves the movable body YM from the second motion position to the initial position.

[Premier production (suddenly big hit notification production)]
In this embodiment, when the special symbol is executing the variable display, the display result is a "big hit" at a timing that should not be originally reported (at the start of variation, at the time of reach establishment, etc.). An effect (suddenly big hit notification effect) can be executed.

In the premium performance, the performance sound K is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the time of start of fluctuation or establishment of ready-to-win. This production sound K is the above-mentioned production sound for the normal jackpot notification production (production sound C1, production sound C2, production sound C3) and the above-mentioned production sound for the big hit notification production at the time of right hitting (production sound D1, production sound D2, This is an effect sound different from the effect sound D3), and is appropriately referred to as "suddenly big win notification sound" or "premium sound".

[Resurrection production]
In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a resurrection performance for notifying that the final display result will be a ``jackpot'' after the display result is ``lost'' in the SP presentation (temporary failure notification). As described in the description of the variation pattern, the resurrection effect can be executed in any variation pattern involving super reach among the challenge SP, battle SP, and story SP.

The revival production is a series of productions shown below.
First, the first recovery display is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 . The first resurrection display consists of characters "FE" which are the first two letters of "FEVER" indicating a "jackpot", and the character (A) is shown inside the first resurrection display. In the first resurrection display, the display color of the entire first resurrection display is white. Also, the effect sound J [first effect sound J] "phi" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the second restoration display, which is an image larger than the first restoration display, is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 . The second resurrection display consists of the characters "FE", which are the first two letters of "FEVER" indicating a "jackpot", and the character (A) is shown inside the second resurrection display. In the second restoration display, the overall display color of the second restoration display is black, which is complementary to white. Also, the effect sound J [first effect sound J] "phi" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the first recovery display is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 . The first resurrection display is white, which is complementary to the display color of the entire first resurrection display, which is black. Also, the effect sound J [first effect sound J] "phi" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, a second recovery display is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 . In the second resurrection display, the display color of the entire second resurrection display is black, which is in a complementary color contrast relationship with white. Also, the effect sound J [first effect sound J] "phi" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, a third recovery display is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 . The third resurrection display consists of the characters "FEVER" indicating a "jackpot", and the character (A) is shown inside the third resurrection display. In the third restoration display, the display color of the entire third restoration display is white. Also, the sound effect J [the first sound effect J and the second sound effect J] "fever" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, every time the first resurrection display and the second resurrection display are displayed, the first effect sound J is scratched and reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R (Figs. 9-42 to 9- 44), and the effect sound J is reproduced and output as "phi, phi, phi, phi, fever".

In this embodiment, the characters "FE" and "FEVER" are composed only of the frame lines of the characters, and the inside of the characters is not filled. Objects placed in the area become visible. The first resurrection display, the second resurrection display, and the third resurrection display are configured with the priority of the display layer of the character A <the display layer of the characters "FE" and "FEVER". ] is partially visible.

In the above-described embodiment, in the resurrection effect, the first resurrection display and the second resurrection display having a larger display size than the first resurrection display are alternately displayed. Not limited to this, in the resurrection effect, the first resurrection display and the second resurrection display having a display size larger than that of the first resurrection display may not be alternately displayed.

For example, in the resurrection effect, a first resurrection display, a second resurrection display having a display size larger than that of the first resurrection display, a third resurrection display having a display size larger than that of the second resurrection display, and a display size larger than that of the third resurrection display. A fourth resurrection display having a larger display size may be displayed in order.

<Production example of revival production>
9-42 to 9-44 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of effect images and effect sounds for each effect related to the resurrection effect. This example shows an example in which the resurrection effect is executed while the defeat effect is being executed during the battle SP effect.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-42 (1), at the timing to execute the defeat effect in the variation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 executes the defeat effect, and the image display device 5 displays the loss notification screen LNI (this example Then, an image including the characters "defeated", the enemy character (X), and the decorative pattern combination "323" indicating a failure is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-42 (2), at the timing when the resurrection effect in the variation pattern should be executed, the effect control CPU 120 ends the defeat effect, executes the resurrection effect, and displays the image display device 5. A first resurrection display REI1 (in this example, an image including characters "FE") is displayed in the center of the screen. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display color of the entire first resurrection display in white. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the effect sound J [first effect sound J] "phi" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-42 (3), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the resurrection effect, and the second resurrection display REI2 (in this example, "FE ) is displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display color of the entire second resurrection display in black, which is in a complementary color contrast relationship with white. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continuously reproduces and outputs the effect sound J [first effect sound J] "phi" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

9-43(4) and (5) are the same as those in FIGS. 9-42(2) and (3), so description thereof will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-43 (6), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the resurrection effect, and the third resurrection display REI3 (in this example, "FEVER ) is displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display color of the entire third resurrection display in white. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the effect sound J [the first effect sound J and the second effect sound J] "Fever" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-44 (7), at the timing when the winning effect should be executed in the variation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 ends the resurrection effect and executes the winning effect. The effect image at this time is the same as that shown in FIG. 9-37(11), so the description is omitted.

[Round display]
In this embodiment, in the big hit game state or the small win game state, the number of rounds of the big hit round game or the number of rounds of the big hit round game via the small hit including the small hit are displayed in the upper left part of the screen of the image display device 5. Display can be displayed. Below, the period of the jackpot round game is appropriately referred to as "jackpot round period".

[In case of design jackpot]
In this embodiment, if the jackpot type is a pattern jackpot,
Round display = number of big hit rounds.
For example, when the jackpot type is "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot", the first round of the jackpot game is displayed as round display = "1ROUND", and the tenth round of the jackpot game is displayed as round display = "10ROUND".

[In the case of a jackpot via a small hit]
In this embodiment, if the jackpot type is a jackpot via a small hit,
(1) Small hit game: Round display = 1 ROUND
(2) Jackpot game: round display = number of jackpot rounds + 1
It has become.
For example, when the jackpot type is "10 (9) R time-saving jackpot via small win", the small win game is displayed as round display = "1ROUND", and the first round of the jackpot game is displayed as round display = "2ROUND". The ninth round of the jackpot game is displayed as round display=“10 ROUND”.

[Music during the jackpot round]
In this embodiment, in the jackpot game, the player can select a song to be played back during the jackpot round. Specifically, when the V-stock effect is not executed during the big win, the player can arbitrarily select the music to be reproduced and output during the big win round from the music A to C.

In the present embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a special operation unit (in this example, a cross key (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1). Only the right and left keys of the special operation part are operable during the period when the music during the jackpot game can be selected, and the music is switched when the player operates the left and right keys of the special operation part.

Also, in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, a special operation promotion display BT2 (in this example, an icon imitating a cross key) prompting the player to operate the special operation unit, and information on the currently selected song are displayed. The shown music display (an object resembling a musical note, the name of the music being played (selected)) is displayed.

In the present embodiment, even during the jackpot round, there are cases where a song cannot be selected, such as when a V-stock effect, which will be described later, is executed. By not displaying BT2, the player is made to recognize that the music cannot be selected.

In this embodiment, only the left and right keys of the special operation section are operable, so the special operation promotion display BT2 is displayed in a mode indicating that only the left and right keys of the special operation section are operable (only the left and right keys are colored). ) is displayed.

<Example of round display>
FIGS. 9-45 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images of effects related to the round display.

<Production example of round display of design jackpot>
FIG. 9-45(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image of each effect related to the round display when a symbol jackpot occurs. In this example, an example is shown in which a round display is displayed when a "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot" occurs as the jackpot type.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-45 (A): (1), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the round game (first round) in the jackpot game state, the effect control CPU 120 displays the image display device 5 normally. A big hit round game image OAI is displayed. This jackpot round game image includes a round display (characters "1ROUND" in this example), a prize ball display indicating the total number of awarded balls (characters "00000pt" in this example), and a normal jackpot. The image includes a background image (a background image including a mountain, the sun, and musical notes).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 always displays a right-handed promotion image on the upper right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 . This always right-handed promotion image includes the characters "Right-handed" and an arrow image that instructs right-handed players to win the second start winning opening, the big winning opening, or the V winning opening (here, the big winning opening). is an image containing

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays a special operation promotion display BT2 and a music display (in this example, an object in the shape of a musical note and the characters "music A") on the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5. FIG.

<Production example of round display of big hit via small hit>
FIG. 9-45(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image of each effect related to the round display when a small win and a big win via a small win occur. In this example, an example is shown in which a round display is displayed when a small win, a V prize, and a big win occur with the small win big win type being "symbol 3 (2) R time-saving big win".

First, as shown in FIG. 9-45 (B): (1), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the small winning game state, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the small winning game image KI. . This small winning game image includes a round display (in this example, the characters "1 Round"), the characters "Aim for the V attacker!" It is an image including an image including a jackpot right hitting promotion image and an image including an ally character (A).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 always displays a right-handed promotion image on the upper right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 . This always-right-handed promotion image includes the characters "Right-handed" and an arrow image instructing right-handed players to win the second start winning opening, the big winning opening, or the V winning opening (here, the V winning opening). is an image containing

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-45 (B): (2), at the timing when the game ball enters the V winning area 870 and the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 87a, the effect control CPU 120 changes the image A V winning occurrence display VI (characters "V GET" in this example) is displayed in the center of the screen of the display device 5 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-45 (B): (3), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the round game (first round) in the jackpot game state, the effect control CPU 120 displays the image display device 5 normally. A big hit round game image OAI is displayed. This jackpot round game image includes a round display (characters "2ROUND" in this example), a prize ball display indicating the total number of awarded balls (characters "00600pt" in this example), and a normal jackpot. and a background image.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 always displays a right-handed promotion image on the upper right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 . In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays a special operation promotion display BT2 and a music display (in this example, an object in the shape of a musical note and the characters "music A") on the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5. FIG.

[Holding series production]
In this embodiment, the case where the RAM 122 as a pending storage buffer stores the pending information determined to be controlled as a "win" (either a "big win" or a "minor win") is referred to as a "holding group". called. In this embodiment, in the holding information stored when the big win occurs, there is holding information that will become a "win" in the future, and the holding information stored when the big win occurs during the big win game state or the time saving state. It is possible to execute a holding continuous effect to notify that the next "hit" will occur continuously within the range of . If the display result of the pending information is "minor win", the big win via the small win is made based on the occurrence of the V prize, so the pending information of the small win is the pending stored information of the win that will become the big win in the future. I can say there is.

In this embodiment, the jackpot fanfare period is called "jackpot FF period", the jackpot round period is called "jackpot RD period", and the jackpot ending period is called "jackpot ED period".

The holding continuation effect includes a first holding continuation effect and a second holding continuation effect. The first holding continuous performance is a performance for notifying that a succession of hits will occur continuously at a predetermined timing (in this example, the jackpot FF period or the jackpot RD period) when the jackpot game state is controlled. be. The second holding consecutive production is a predetermined timing when it is controlled to the time saving state (in this example, the period from when it is controlled to the time saving state to the start of the hit fluctuation display that is the target of the holding consecutive production ), which is an effect that notifies that a succession of hits will occur.

In this embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of second pending memories is "4", so if the display result of all the pending memories is "win", the maximum value of the number of pending runs, which is the number of pending runs, is " 4”.

[Next time confirmed performance]
In this embodiment, when the big hit occurs, the type of the big hit is the "next fixed big hit"("symbol 10R time-saving big hit" (99 times) or "10 (9) time-saving (99 times)), and in the time-saving state controlled after the end of the big-win game state during the big-win game state or the time-saving state, it notifies that the next 'win' will occur substantially continuously next time. It is possible to execute a fixed production. Hereinafter, a case in which the next "hit" occurs substantially continuously will be referred to as "next consecutive".

The next fixed performance includes a first fixed performance and a second fixed performance. The 1st fixed performance informs that a win is generated substantially continuously at a predetermined timing (in this example, a jackpot FF period or a jackpot RD period) when the jackpot game state is controlled. It is a performance to do. The second fixed effect is substantially continuous at a predetermined timing when it is controlled to the time saving state (in this example, the period from being controlled to the time saving state to the start of the next hit variation display). This is an effect that informs that a hit will occur by doing so.

In this embodiment, since the upper limit value of the second reserved memory number is "4", when the jackpot type of the relevant jackpot and all the jackpot types of the reserved memory are "next fixed jackpot", it is the number of the next series. The maximum value of the next run number is "5".

[V stock production]
In this embodiment, the case of at least one of "reserved series" and "next series" is appropriately referred to as "V stock" and "hit is stocked". In the present embodiment, the performance modes of the pending continuous effect and the next fixed effect are common, and the execution timing of the pending continuous effect and the next fixed effect are also common. called.

In this embodiment, since the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number is "4", the maximum value of the V stock number (holding run number or next run number), which is the number of V stocks, is "5".

As shown in FIG. 9-46, the first holding continuous effect and the first fixed effect executed in the jackpot game state are called "first V stock effect", and the second holding continuous effect executed in the time saving state is called. The second fixed effect is called "second V stock effect".

<1st V stock production>
Among the V stock effects, the first V stock effect (first holding continuous effect, first fixed effect) is a series of effects shown below.

First, the first V-stock display is displayed in the central portion of the screen of the image display device 5 at a predetermined timing when the jackpot game state is being controlled. The first V stock display is composed of the initial letter "V" of "V STOCK" indicating that it is V stock, and the character (A) is shown inside the first V stock display. The display color of the entire first V stock display is white. At this time, the effect sound A [first effect sound A] "b" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Also, music X [music data X1 (scratch: 4 times) and music data X2] "We, We, We, We, Welcome Lucky (hereinafter omitted)" is also reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

At this time, while the channel setting ratio of the effect sound A reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R is set to 100%, the channel setting ratio of the music piece X reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R is set to 20%. While the clarity of the music piece X is lowered, the clarity of the effect sound A is improved. Also, if any of the music (music A to music C) has been reproduced and output before the first V stock effect is executed, the reproduction output of that music is terminated, and the reproduction output of music X is started. That is, the music piece X, which is the music piece related to the first V-stock effect, is reproduced and output with priority given to other music pieces.

Next, a second V stock display, which is an image larger than the first V stock display, is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 . The second V stock display is composed of the initial letter "V" of "V STOCK" indicating that it is V stock, and the character (A) is shown inside the second V stock display. In the second V stock display, the overall display color of the second V stock display is black, which is complementary to white. At this time, the effect sound A [first effect sound A] "b" is continuously reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Also, the music piece X [music piece data X2] is continuously reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the first V stock display is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 . The display color of the entire first V stock display is white. At this time, the effect sound A [first effect sound A] "b" is continuously reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Also, the music piece X [music piece data X2] is continuously reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Then, the second V stock display is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 . In the second V stock display, the overall display color of the second V stock display is black, which is complementary to white. At this time, the effect sound A [first effect sound A] "b" is continuously reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Also, the music piece X [music piece data X2] is continuously reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, a third V stock display is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 . The third V stock display is composed of the characters "V STOCK" indicating that it is in V stock, and the character (A) is shown inside the third V stock display. In the third V stock display, the display color of the letter "V" is white, and the display color of the letter "STOCK" is black. Also, the effect sound A [the first effect sound A and the second effect sound A] "V-stock" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Also, the music piece X [music piece data X2] is continuously reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, each time the first V stock display and the second V stock display are displayed, the first sound effect A is scratched and reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R. , bu, bu, bu stock" is reproduced and output. (See Figures 9-51 and 9-52).

Next, an operation prompting display is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 . At this time, the music piece X [music piece data X2] is continuously reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the display of the V stock number is displayed in the central portion of the screen of the image display device 5 with a predetermined trigger (operation of the push button 31B, elapse of a predetermined period of time, etc.). The V stock number display consists of the rainbow colored "V", the black "STOCK" and the "x [V stock]". The [V stock number] portion of “×[V stock number]” indicates a number from “1” to “5” according to the V stock number. At this time, the music piece X [music piece data X2] is continuously reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the image display device 5 displays a special big winning round game image OBI. This jackpot round game image consists of a round display, a display of the number of winning balls, a special jackpot background image (a background image including characters A, B, and C), a rainbow-colored telop display, and a reduced V stock. is an image including a number display;

At this time, the music piece X [music piece data X1 (scratch: 4 times) and music piece data X2] “We, We, We, We, Welcome Lucky (hereinafter omitted)” is continuously reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. . At this time, the clarity of the music X is improved by setting the channel setting ratio of the music X reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R to 100%.

Then, the first V stock effect ends when the big win game state ends. In the first V stock effect in the big win RD period, the special big win round game image OBI is continuously displayed on the image display device 5. - 特許庁In the final round first V stock effect in the big win RD period, a rainbow telop display and a V stock number display are superimposed on the big win final round game image OLI. In the first V stock during the jackpot ED period, only the rainbow telop display is continuously displayed on the upper right portion and the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 . Since the jackpot ED period is a period during which the time-saving rush effect, which will be described later, is executed, a rainbow-colored telop display is superimposed on the effect image of the time-saving rush effect.

<Second V stock production>
Among the V stock effects, the second V stock effect (second holding continuous effect, second fixed effect) is a series of effects shown below.

First, at the timing when the control to the time saving state is started, the special time saving background image is displayed as a background image on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 9-63). This special time-saving background image includes the characters “Powerful RUSH”, production mode emblems (“Dream Mode” emblem, “Nana Mode” emblem, “Jam Mode” emblem), rainbow telop display, and reduced V stock. It is an image including a number display and each character (character A, character B, and character C). The special time-saving background images include a first special time-saving background image (for dream mode), a second special time-saving background image (for Nana mode), and a third special time-saving background image (for jam mode).

At this time, a special active display guide ACG for displaying the active display is displayed in the active display area ACE, and a special second reserved display guide PD2G for displaying the second reserved display is displayed in the second reserved display area PD2E. Is displayed.

Next, when the variable display based on the reserved memory that is the target of the V stock is started, the second V stock effect is terminated, and the reduced V stock number display of the special time-saving background image is digested (erased), A V stock opening performance (not shown) is executed to notify that a "hit" corresponding to the V stock will occur in the variable display. In this embodiment, even after the second V stock effect is terminated and the V stock open effect is executed, the special time-saving background image other than the reduced V stock number display is continuously displayed on the image display device 5.例文帳に追加During the small winning game and the big winning game corresponding to the V stock, only the rainbow-colored telop display is continuously superimposed on the effect image.

Also, in the second V-stock effect, the music X scratched from the speakers 8L and 8R [music data X1 (scratched 4 times) and music data X2] "We, we, we, we, welcome lucky (below)." is played back. However, during the period when the variable display of the special symbols is not executed, the player cannot recognize the reproduction output of the music X because the mute processing is executed with the channel setting ratio of the music X set to 0%. On the other hand, by setting the channel setting ratio of music X to 100% during the period when the variable display of the special symbols is executed, the player can recognize the reproduced output of music X.

[Production determination process at the start of the jackpot]
FIG. 9-47 is a flow chart showing effect determination processing executed during a big hit. The effect control CPU 120 executes the effect determination process at the start of the big hit shown in FIGS. Specifically, upon receiving the jackpot start designation command, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance to be executed (and the performance not to be executed) during the big win by the performance determination process at the start of the big win shown in FIG. 9-47.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the big win occurred during the effect mode of either rush challenge or powerful rush (step S05TM3010). If the jackpot is not a jackpot that occurred during either the rush challenge or the powerful rush effect mode (step S05TM3010: NO), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the process.

If the jackpot is a jackpot that occurred during either the rush challenge or the powerful rush production mode (step S05TM3010: YES), the production control CPU 120 determines to execute a jackpot type notification production described later (step S05TM3020), it is determined whether or not the display result of any of the reserved memories is a "small hit" or a "big hit" (step S05TM3030).

If the display result of any one of the pending memories is "small win" or "big win" (step S05TM3030: YES), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S05TM3050.

When none of the display results in the reserved storage is "small hit" or "big hit" (step S05TM3030: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot type of the jackpot is "10R jackpot A". (Step S05TM3040). When the jackpot type of the jackpot is not "10R jackpot A" (step S05TM3040: NO), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S05TM3080.

When the jackpot type of the jackpot is "10R jackpot A" (step S05TM3040: YES), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S05TM3050.

After step S05TM3030: YES or step S05TM3040: YES, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first V stock effect is to be executed. (see step S05TM3050), and determines whether or not it is decided to execute the first V stock effect (step S05TM3060). If it is determined not to execute the first V stock effect (step S05TM3060: NO), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S05TM3080.

If it is determined to execute the first V stock effect (step S05TM3060: YES), effect control CPU 120 sets a V stock flag (step S05TM3070), which will be described later, and advances the process to step S05TM3080.

Step S05TM3040: NO, step S05TM3060: NO, or after step S05TM3070, the effect control CPU 120 determines the jackpot type notified in the jackpot type notification effect, and the jackpot type notified in the jackpot type notification effect. A determination is made based on the table (see FIG. 9-48(B)) (step S05TM3080), and the process ends.

In this embodiment, the V stock flag is a kind of effect flag that is set based on the determination that the first V stock effect is to be executed. By setting the V stock flag, it becomes possible to decide to execute the second V stock effect in the fluctuation start wait time effect determination process described later, and to execute the second V stock effect in the change start time effect determination process described later. It becomes possible to decide to continue running. This V stock flag is erased when the winning variation display corresponding to the target V stock (holding series, next series) when the V stock flag is set is completed.

[Table to be referred to in the production determination process at the start of the jackpot]
FIGS. 9-48 (A) and (B) are specific examples of tables referred to in any one of the processing for determining the effect at the start of the jackpot. FIG. 9-48(A) is an example of the execution/non-execution determination table of the first V stock effect that is referenced when determining whether or not the first V stock effect is to be executed in step S05TM3050. FIG. 9-48(B) is an example of a jackpot type determination table notified in the jackpot type notification effect referred to when determining the jackpot type notified in the jackpot type notification effect in step S05TM3080.

<Decision table for execution/non-execution of first V stock effect>
FIG. 9-48(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the execution/non-execution determination table for the first V stock effect. As shown in FIG. 9-48(A), in this embodiment, the items for whether or not the first V stock effect is executed are "not executed", "executed (jackpot FF period)", and "executed (jackpot FF period)". RD period)" can be determined, and a judgment value is assigned to each of these items. "Execution (jackpot FF period)" means that the first V stock effect is determined to be executed during the jackpot FF period, and "execution (jackpot RD period)" means that the first V stock effect is executed during the jackpot RD. It is to decide to run for a period of time.

As shown in Figure 9-48 (A), 50% of the decisions are made to "no execution", 25% of decisions are made to "execute (jackpot FF period)", and 25% of the decisions are made to "execute Yes (jackpot RD period)”.

<Jackpot type determination table notified in the jackpot type notification effect>
FIG. 9-48(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a big hit type determination table notified in the big hit type notification effect. As shown in FIG. 9-48(B), in this embodiment, whether the jackpot type of the jackpot is "10R jackpot A", "10R jackpot B", or "3R jackpot B", and V stock Depending on whether or not the flag is set, the jackpot type to be notified in the jackpot type notification effect is determined.

As shown in FIG. 9-48 (B), when the jackpot type of the jackpot is "10R jackpot A" and the V stock flag is not set (when the V stock flag is not set), the When the second big win type "MAX BONUS" is determined, the V stock flag is set (when the V stock flag is set), and the execution timing of the first V stock effect is the big win FF period, it will be described later. When the third jackpot type ``V STOCK BONUS'' is determined and the V stock flag is set and the execution timing of the first V stock performance is the jackpot RD period, the second jackpot type ``MAX BONUS''. to decide.

In addition, when the jackpot type of the jackpot is "10R jackpot B", when the V stock flag is not set, the second jackpot type "MAX BONUS" is determined, and when the V stock flag is set. Then, when the execution timing of the first V stock effect is the jackpot FF period, the third jackpot type "V STOCK BONUS" is determined, and when the V stock flag is set, the execution timing of the first V stock effect. is the jackpot RD period, the second jackpot type "MAX BONUS" is determined.

Further, when the jackpot type of the jackpot is "3R jackpot B", when the V stock flag is not set, the first jackpot type "BONUS" is determined, and when the V stock flag is set. , When the execution timing of the first V stock effect is the jackpot FF period, the third jackpot type "V STOCK BONUS" is determined, and when the V stock flag is set, the execution timing of the first V stock effect is When it is the jackpot RD period, the first jackpot type "BONUS" is determined.

Thus, since the third big win type "V STOCK BONUS" is reported only when the V stock flag is set, the third big win type "V STOCK BONUS" will be reported from now on. It can be said that this is an effect for notifying that the stock effect will be executed.

[Jackpot type notification effect]
In this embodiment, during the jackpot FF period of the jackpot game state, it is possible to execute a jackpot type notification effect of notifying the jackpot type of the jackpot. A first jackpot that notifies that the jackpot type notified in the jackpot type notification performance is "3R jackpot B" (that is, "symbol 3R short-time jackpot" or "3 (2) R short-time jackpot via small hit"). Type and second big hit type that informs that it is “10R big hit B” (that is, “symbol 10R short time big hit” (7 times) or “10 (9) R time short big hit via small hit” (7 times)) And the third big hit type that informs that it is "10R big hit A" (that is, "symbol 10R short time big hit" (99 times) or "10 (9) R time short big hit via small hit" (99 times)) , is provided.

The characters "BONUS" are indicated for the first jackpot type, the characters "MAX BONUS" are indicated for the second jackpot type, and the characters "V STOCK BONUS" are indicated for the third jackpot type.

The jackpot type notification effect is a series of effects shown below.
First, as shown in FIG. 9-49 (1), when the CPU 103 starts the jackpot FF period, the first jackpot type candidate display OSA is displayed at the upper center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the second jackpot type candidate is displayed at the bottom left of the screen. The display OSB and the third big hit type candidate display OSC are displayed in the lower right portion of the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-49(2), an operation prompting display BT prompting the player to operate the operation unit (in this example, the push button 31B) is placed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 as the first jackpot. The type candidate display OSA, the second big hit type candidate display OSB, and the third big hit type candidate display OSC are superimposed and displayed.

Next, when the player operates the operation unit, the big win type determined in step S05TM3080 of the big win start effect determination process is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. FIG.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-49 (3A), when the jackpot type determined in step S05TM3080 of the jackpot start effect determination process is the first jackpot type, the characters "BONUS" are displayed as an image. When the jackpot type determined in step S05TM3080 of the jackpot start determination process is the second jackpot type displayed on the entire screen of the device 5 as shown in FIG. 9-49 (3B), "MAX BONUS". character is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. , “V STOCK BONUS” are displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 .

<Production example of a big hit (no first V stock production)>
FIG. 9-50 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image and an effect sound of each effect related to a big win in which the first V-stock effect is not executed. In this example, it is assumed that a V winning occurs in a small winning game, and a big winning having a big winning type of "10 (9) R time-saving big winning via small winning" occurs.

First, the effect images in FIGS. 9-50 (1A) and (1B) are the same as those in FIGS. 9-49 (3A) and (3B) described above, so description thereof will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-50 (2), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the round game (first round) in the jackpot game state, the effect control CPU 120 displays the normal jackpot round game image on the image display device 5. Display the OAI. This jackpot round game image is an image including a round display (characters of "2ROUND" in this example), a number of winning balls display (characters of "00600pt" in this example), and a normal jackpot background image. . At this time, the effect control CPU 120 always displays a right-handed promotion image on the upper right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 .

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays a special operation promotion display BT2 and a music display (in this example, an object in the shape of a musical note and the characters "music A") on the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5. FIG. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the non-scratched effect sound A [music data A] "powerful power (hereinafter omitted)" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

<Big hit (with 1st V stock effect during the big hit FF period)>
FIGS. 9-51 to 9-53 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of effect images and effect sounds of each effect related to the big win in which the first V stock effect is executed during the big win FF period. In this example, it is assumed that a V winning occurs in a small winning game, and a big winning having a big winning type of "10 (9) R time-saving big winning via small winning" occurs.

First, the effect image in FIG. 9-51(1) is the same as that in FIG. 9-49(3C) described above, so the description is omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-51 (2), at the timing to execute the first V stock effect in the jackpot FF period, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first V stock display VSI1 in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. display. The first V stock display is composed of the initial letter "V" of "V STOCK" indicating that it is V stock, and the character (A) is shown inside the first V stock display. The display color of the entire first V stock display is white.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the effect sound A [first effect sound A] "bu" from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 also reproduces and outputs music X [music data X1 (scratch: 4 times) and music data X2] "We, We, We, We, Welcome Lucky (hereinafter omitted)" from the speakers 8L, 8R. .

In this example, the channel setting ratio of the sound effect A at this time is set to 100%, while the channel setting ratio of the music piece X is set to 20%. Improves clarity.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-51 (3), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the first V stock effect, and an image larger than the first V stock display is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. A second V stock display VSI2 is displayed. The second V stock display is composed of the initial letter "V" of "V STOCK" indicating that it is V stock, and the character (A) is shown inside the second V stock display. In the second V stock display, the overall display color of the second V stock display is black, which is complementary to white.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously reproduces and outputs the effect sound A [first effect sound A] "bu" from the speakers 8L and 8R. The performance control CPU 120 also continuously reproduces and outputs music X [music data X2] from the speakers 8L and 8R.

9-52(4) and (5) are the same as those in FIGS. 9-51(2) and (3), so their description is omitted. 9-52(4) is the same as FIG. 9-51(2) except that the music piece X [music piece data X2] is continuously reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-52(6), the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the third V stock display VSI3 in the center of the screen. The third V stock display is composed of the characters "V STOCK" indicating that it is in V stock, and the character (A) is shown inside the third V stock display. In the third V stock display, the display color of the letter "V" is white, and the display color of the letter "STOCK" is black.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the effect sound A [the first effect sound A and the second effect sound A] "V-stock" from the speakers 8L and 8R. The performance control CPU 120 also continuously reproduces and outputs music X [music data X2] from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, every time the first V-stock display VSI1 and the second V-stock display VSI2 are displayed, the first effect sound A is scratched and reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R. Bu, bu, bu, bu stock" is reproduced and output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-53 (7), the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an operation prompting display in the center of the screen. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously reproduces and outputs the music X [music data X2] from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-53 (8), at a predetermined trigger (operation of the push button 31B, elapse of a predetermined period of time, etc.), the effect control CPU 120 causes the V stock number to be displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. VNI ("V STOCK x 1" in this example) is displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously reproduces and outputs the music X [music data X2] from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-53 (9), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the round game (first round) in the jackpot game state, the effect control CPU 120 displays a special jackpot round game image on the image display device 5. Display the OBI. This jackpot round game image consists of a round display (characters "2ROUND" in this example), a prize ball display (characters "00600pt" in this example), a special jackpot background image, and a rainbow telop display TI. and a reduced V stock number representation VNI.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the music X [music data X1 (scratch: 4 times) and music data X2] "We, We, We, We, Welcome Lucky (hereinafter omitted)" from the speakers 8L, 8R. is played back. At the timing when the jackpot round game starts, the clarity of the music X is improved by setting the channel setting ratio of the music X reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R to 100%.

<Jackpot (with 1st V stock effect during jackpot RD period)>
FIGS. 9-54 to 9-57 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of effect images and effect sounds of each effect related to the big win in which the first V stock effect is executed during the period of the big win RD. In this example, it is assumed that a V winning occurs in a small winning game, and a big winning having a big winning type of "10 (9) R time-saving big winning via small winning" occurs.

First, the effect images and sound effects in FIGS. 9-54 (1A), (1B), and (2) are the same as those in FIGS. omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-54 (3), the effect control CPU 120 executes the first V stock effect, erases the normal big hit round game image OAI on the image display device 5, and displays the first V stock effect in the center of the screen. Display the stock display VSI1. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the round display (in this example, the characters "3ROUND") and the prize ball display (in this example, the characters "00750pt").

Also, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the effect sound A [first effect sound A] "bu" from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the reproduction output of the music piece A [music piece data A] from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the music piece X [music piece data X1 (scratch: 4 times) and music piece data X2] "We, we, WE, WE, WELCOME LUCKY (hereafter omitted)” is started to be reproduced.

In this example, the channel setting ratio of the sound effect A at this time is set to 100%, while the channel setting ratio of the music piece X is set to 20%. Improves clarity.

Also, the effect control CPU 120 does not display any information related to the music in the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5, although the music X is reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-54(4), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the first V stock effect, and an image larger than the first V stock display is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. A second V stock display VSI2 is displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the round display (in this example, the characters "3ROUND") and the prize ball display (in this example, the characters "00750pt").

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continuously reproduces and outputs the effect sound A [first effect sound A] "bu" from the speakers 8L and 8R. The performance control CPU 120 also continuously reproduces and outputs music X [music data X2] from the speakers 8L and 8R.

9-55(5) and (6) are the same as those in FIGS. 9-54(3) and 9-55(4) described above, so description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in FIGS. 9-54(3) and 9-55(4), it is assumed that the round display and the number of prize balls display have been updated as shown in the drawings. 9-55(5) is the same as FIG. 9-54(3) except that the music piece X [music piece data X2] is continuously reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R.

9-56(7) to 9-57(10) are the same as those shown in FIGS. omitted. In addition, in FIGS. 9-56(7) to 9-57(10), it is assumed that the round display and the number of prize balls display have been updated as shown in the drawings.

As shown in FIG. 9-57 (10), the effect control CPU 120 outputs music X [music data X1 (scratch: 4 times) and music data X2] from speakers 8L and 8R. , Welcome Lucky (abbreviated below)” is continuously reproduced and output. The clarity of the music X is improved by setting the channel setting ratio of the music X reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R to 100% at the timing when the jackpot round game is started. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 causes the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 to display a music display (in this example, an object resembling a musical note and the characters “music X”). However, the effect control CPU 120 does not display the special operation prompting display BT2 on the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 .

In this way, when the first V stock effect is executed during the jackpot RD period, various effects related to the jackpot round game that was executed before the first V stock effect was executed (display of the normal jackpot round game image, music Playback output of A) is interrupted, and different from various effects (display of normal jackpot round game image, playback output of song A) related to the jackpot round game that was previously executed after the first V stock effect was executed. Various effects of the effect mode (display of the special jackpot round game image, reproduction output of the music piece X) are restarted.

[Production determination process at the end of the jackpot]
FIG. 9-58 is a flow chart showing effect determination processing executed during a big hit. The effect control CPU 120 executes the effect determination process at the end of the big hit shown in FIG. 9-58 in the effect process (step S176) during the big hit of the effect control process shown in FIG. Specifically, upon receiving the jackpot end designation command, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) at the end of the big win by the effect determination process at the end of the big win shown in FIG. 9-58.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect mode after the end of the big hit is the rush mode (step S05TM4010). If the effect mode after the end of the big hit is not the rush mode (step S05TM4010: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

If the effect mode after the end of the big hit is the rush mode (step S05TM4010: YES), the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute a time-saving rush effect (step S05TM4020), and ends the process.

[Production mode in rush mode]
In this embodiment, "Dream Mode", "Nana Mode", and "Jam Mode" are provided as production modes when the rush mode is controlled. "Dream mode" is a production mode in which character A mainly appears, "Nana mode" is a production mode in which character B mainly appears, and "jam mode" is a production mode in which character C mainly appears. mode.

In this embodiment, the player can select in which production mode the rush mode is to be played. Specifically, in the final round of the big hit round game (3rd round if 3R big win, 10th round if 10R big win), the final big hit round game image is displayed on the image display device 5 . The game image for the final round of the jackpot includes a first selection section (Muyume mode) on the left side of the screen, a second selection section (Nana mode) on the center of the screen, and a third selection section (Jam mode) on the right side of the screen. , is provided. By operating the operation section, the player can select one of the effect modes shown in the first to third selection sections of the game image for the final round of big hits.

In the present embodiment, in the final round game image for the big hit on the image display device 5, the selected portion of each selection portion is in the normal color (the normal character color of each character (character A: hair is green, skin is green). Skin color, cloak is displayed in red, etc.)), and the mode at this time is called a "selection mode". Referred to as the "non-selected embodiment".

In the present embodiment, when the final round of the jackpot round game is started and the display of the jackpot final round game image on the image display device 5 is started, the first selection portion (dream mode) of the jackpot final round game image is displayed. is displayed in the selected mode, and the second selection section (nana mode) and the third selection section (jam mode) are displayed in the non-selection mode. Then, when the final round of the big winning round game is finished and the display of the big winning final round game image on the image display device 5 is finished, the performance corresponding to the selection part of the big winning final round game image is selected. The mode is determined as the production mode to be executed in the rush mode.

<Production example of production mode in rush mode>
FIG. 9-59 is an explanation showing an example of an effect image of each effect related to the case where the effect mode in the rush mode is selected in the final round of the jackpot round period and the selected effect mode is controlled to the rush mode. It is a diagram.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-59 (1), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the round game (final round) in the jackpot game state, the effect control CPU 120 displays the jackpot final round game image on the image display device 5. Display OLI. This jackpot final round game image includes a round display (in this example, the characters “Final ROUND”), a winning ball display (in this example, the characters “00300pt”), and first to third selection sections. and is an image containing. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first selection portion in the selected mode, and displays the second selected portion and the third selected portion in the non-selected mode. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays a special operation prompting display BT2 and a music display (in this example, an object in the shape of a musical note and the letters "music A") on the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5.

In this state, when the CPU 103 ends the round game (final round) in the jackpot game state, the pattern determined in the first selection section (Dream mode) shown in FIG. 9-59 (2A), FIG. The pattern determined by the second selection section (nana mode) shown in 59(2B) or the pattern determined by the third selection section (jam mode) shown in FIG. 9-59(2C) is proceeded to.

(Pattern determined in the first selection section (Yume Yume mode))
As shown in FIG. 9-59 (2A), when the CPU 103 ends the round game (final round) in the jackpot game state, the effect control CPU 120, based on the operation of the operation unit by the player, the first The selection section is displayed in the selection mode, and the second selection section and the third selection section are displayed in the non-selection mode. At this time, the round display (in this example, characters of "Final ROUND") and the number of winning balls display (in this example, characters of "00450pt") are updated.

In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the dream mode corresponding to the first selection section as the effect mode of the rush mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-59 (3A), when it is controlled to the time-saving state and the production mode is controlled to the rush mode: dream dream mode, the production control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the background image as the first. 1 Display the normal time-saving background image. This first normal time-saving background image includes the characters “powerful RUSH”, the remaining time-saving display (in this example, the characters “remaining 6 times”), the “dream mode” emblem EMI1, and the character (A) CA. and is an image containing.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5 based on the fact that the variable display of the special symbols is executed. . In addition, the active display area AC in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area ACE.

(Pattern determined by the second selection section (nana mode))
As shown in FIG. 9-59 (2B), when the CPU 103 ends the round game (final round) in the jackpot game state, the effect control CPU 120, based on the operation of the operation unit by the player, the second The selection section is displayed in the selection mode, and the first selection section and the third selection section are displayed in the non-selection mode. At this time, the round display (in this example, characters of "Final ROUND") and the number of winning balls display (in this example, characters of "00450pt") are updated.

In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the nana mode corresponding to the second selection section as the effect mode of the rush mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-59 (3B), when it is controlled to the time-saving state and the production mode is controlled to the rush mode: Nana mode, the production control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the second normal image as the background image. Display a time-saving background image. This second normal time-saving background image includes the characters “powerful RUSH”, the remaining time-saving display (in this example, the characters “remaining 6 times”), the “Nana mode” emblem EMI2, the character (B) CB, is an image containing

At this time, based on the fact that the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. Running. In addition, the active display area AC in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area ACE.

(Pattern determined in the third selection section (jam mode))
As shown in FIG. 9-59 (2C), when the CPU 103 ends the round game (final round) in the jackpot game state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the third The selection section is displayed in the selection mode, and the first selection section and the second selection section are displayed in the non-selection mode. At this time, the round display (in this example, characters of "Final ROUND") and the number of winning balls display (in this example, characters of "00450pt") are updated.

In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the jam mode corresponding to the third selection section as the effect mode of the rush mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-59 (3C), it is controlled to the time-saving state, and when the production mode is controlled to the rush mode: jam mode, the production control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the third image as the background image. Display the normal time-saving background image. This third normal time-saving background image includes the characters “powerful RUSH”, the remaining time-saving display (in this example, “remaining 6 times” characters), the “jam mode” emblem EMI3, and the character (C) CC. is an image containing

At this time, based on the fact that the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. Running. In addition, the active display area AC in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area ACE.

[Effect decision processing when waiting for fluctuation start]
FIG. 9-60 is a flow chart showing effect determination processing executed when waiting for the start of variation. The effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display start waiting process (step S170) of the effect control process shown in FIG. Specifically, when receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) during the waiting period for the start of the variable display, as shown in FIG. 9-60. determined by

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect mode is the rush mode (step S05TM5010). If the effect mode is not the rush mode (step S05TM5010: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

If the effect mode is the rush mode (step S05TM5010: YES), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the V stock flag is set (step S05TM5020). If the V stock flag is not set (step S05TM5020: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the V stock flag is set (step S05TM5020: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the second V stock effect (step S05TM5020), and ends the process.

Thus, as shown in step S05TM5020: YES→step S05TM5030 of the variation start wait time effect determination process, when the V stock flag is set, it is decided to execute the second V stock effect.

[Determining Whether or Not to Execute Second V Stock Effect at Start of Fluctuation]
FIG. 9-61 is a flow chart showing the effect determination process executed at the start of fluctuation. The effect control CPU 120 executes the second V stock effect execution presence/absence determination process at the start of variation shown in FIG. 9-61 in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-described one set of commands associated with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols is designated as a display result. A production control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the production) to be executed based on the command and the variation pattern designation command is set, and whether or not the second V stock production is executed is shown in FIG. It is determined by the second V stock effect execution presence/absence determination process at the start of variation shown in 9-61.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect mode is the rush mode (step S05TM6010). If the effect mode is not the rush mode (step S05TM6010: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the effect mode is the rush mode (step S05TM6010: YES), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the V stock flag is set (step S05TM6020). If the V stock flag is not set (step S05TM6020: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

When the V stock flag is set (step S05TM6020: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation display is a hit variation display targeted by the V stock flag (step S05TM6030).

If the variation display is not the winning variation display targeted by the V stock flag (step S05TM6030: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines to continue executing the second V stock effect (step S05TM6040), and processes as it is. exit.

If the variation display is the winning variation display targeted by the V stock flag (step S05TM6030: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines to end the second V stock effect (step S05TM6050), and ends the process as it is. do.

Thus, as shown in step S05TM6020: YES→step S05TM6030: NO→step S05TM6040 of the second V stock effect execution execution/non-execution determination process at the start of variation, the V stock flag is set and the variation display is V. If it is not the hit variation display targeted by the stock flag, it is determined to continue the second V stock effect. Further, as shown in step S05TM6020: YES→step S05TM6030: YES→step S05TM6050 of the process for determining whether or not to execute the second V stock effect at the start of fluctuation, the V stock flag is set and the fluctuation display is the V stock flag. , it is decided to end the second V stock effect.

[Production mode according to the presence or absence of V stock in time saving (rush mode)]
In this embodiment, when the time-saving state (rush mode) is controlled, depending on whether or not the V stock flag is set, the effect mode related to the effect image and the effect sound during the rush mode is different. That is, depending on whether the second V stock effect is being executed, the rush mode effect mode differs.

In this embodiment, the player can select a song to be reproduced and output during the rush mode. Specifically, when the V-stock effect is not being executed during the rush mode, the player can arbitrarily select a song to be reproduced and output during the rush mode from songs A to C. Further, when the V stock effect is being executed during the rush mode, the player cannot arbitrarily select the music to be reproduced and output during the rush mode from among the music A to C, and the music during the rush mode cannot be selected. , music X is fixed and reproduced.

<Production example for time saving (no second V stock production)>
FIG. 9-62 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image and an effect sound of each effect related when the second V stock effect is not executed when the game state is the time saving state and the effect mode is the rush mode. . In this example, the second V stock effect is not executed because the V stock flag is not set when the effect mode is the dream dream mode.

As shown in FIG. 9-62, when it is controlled to the time-saving state and the production mode is controlled to the rush mode: dream dream mode, the production control CPU 120 displays the image display device 5 as the background image as the first normal time-saving background image. display. This first normal time-saving background image includes the characters “powerful RUSH”, the remaining time-saving display (in this example, the characters “remaining 6 times”), the “dream mode” emblem EMI1, and the character (A) CA. and is an image containing.

At this time, based on the fact that the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. In the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small patterns are variably displayed. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display AC in the normal mode in the active display area ACE, and displays four second reserved displays PD2 in the normal mode in the second reserved display area PD2E.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays a special operation prompting display BT2 and a music display (in this example, an object in the shape of a musical note and the letters "music A") on the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the music A [music data A] from the speakers 8L and 8R.

<Production example for time saving (with second V stock production)>
FIG. 9-63 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image and effect sound of each effect related when the second V stock effect is executed when the game state is the time saving state and the effect mode is the rush mode. be. This example shows an example in which the second V stock effect is executed based on the fact that the V stock flag is set when the effect mode is the dream dream mode.

As shown in FIG. 9-63, when it is controlled to the time-saving state and the production mode is controlled to the rush mode: dream dream mode, the production control CPU 120 displays the image display device 5 as the background image as the first special time-saving background image. display. This first special time-saving background image includes the characters “Powerful RUSH”, the “Yume Yume Mode” emblem EMI1, the character (A) CA, the rainbow telop display TI, and the reduced V stock number display VNI. is an image containing

At this time, based on the fact that the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. In the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small patterns are variably displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the normal mode active display AC in the special active display guide ACG of the active display area ACE, and displays the normal mode active display AC in the special second reserved display guide PD2G of the second reserved display area PD2E. Four 2-hold displays PD2 are displayed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays a music display (in this example, an object in the shape of a musical note and the characters “music X”) on the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 . At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs music X [music data X1 (scratch: 4 times) and music data X2] from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the time-saving state in which the second V-stock effect is not being executed, the player can arbitrarily select a plurality of types of music (in this example, music A to music C) during the rush mode. Since it is possible, a special operation prompting display BT2 is displayed in the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 . On the other hand, in the time-saving state in which the second V-stock effect is being executed, the player cannot arbitrarily select the music during the rush mode from among multiple types of music (in this example, music A to music C). Therefore, the special operation promotion display BT2 is not displayed in the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5. FIG.

Also, the fixed effect image displayed on the image display device 5 (hereinafter referred to as an “interface” as appropriate) is in a state where the second V stock effect is being executed rather than in the time saving state where the second V stock effect is not being executed. The time saving state has a more gorgeous display mode. The interface in this embodiment refers to areas for displaying corresponding displays (active display area, second reserved display area) and background images.

Specifically, in the time-saving state in which the second V stock effect is not executed, a simple active display guide is displayed in the active display area, and no guide is displayed in the second reserved display area, while the second V In the time-saving state in which the stock effect is executed, a splendid special active display guide ACG is displayed in the active display area, and a splendid special second suspension display guide PD2G is displayed in the second suspension display area. Further, in the time-saving state in which the second V stock effect is not being executed, the background image does not include the rainbow-colored telop display TI, while in the time-saving state in which the second V stock effect is being executed, the rainbow-colored telop is displayed in the background image. Indication TI is included.

Further, in the present embodiment, while the number of remaining time reductions is displayed in the time reduction state in which the second V stock effect is not being executed, the remaining time reduction number display is displayed in the time reduction state in which the second V stock effect is being executed. not shown. This is because the player must generate a "hit" before the rush mode ends in a time-saving state in which the second V-stock effect is not executed, which is a state in which the next "hit" is not determined. Since the display of the number of times of remaining time saving that can recognize the number of times of saving time remaining is necessary information for the player, the display of the number of times of remaining time saving is displayed. On the other hand, in the time-saving state in which the second V-stock effect is being executed, which is a state in which the next "win" is confirmed, the player recognizes that the "win" will occur before the rush mode ends. Since the display of the number of remaining time reductions that can recognize the number of remaining time reductions is unnecessary information for the player, the display of the number of remaining time reductions is not displayed.

In addition, in the time saving state in which the second V stock effect is being executed, the remaining time saving number display may be displayed. In this case, the display of the number of remaining time reductions is displayed as "∞ times remaining". Suggesting that the number of remaining time-saving times is infinite (remaining time-saving number display "∞ remaining times") in the time-saving state in which the second V stock effect is being executed, which is a state in which the next "win" is confirmed. Thus, it can be suggested that the time saving state will continue until the next "hit" occurs, and the player can be relieved. However, in fact, infinite time reduction control is not performed, and by displaying the remaining time reduction number display as "remaining ∞ times", it is suggested that it is on hold or next time.

[Round display after V stock effect]
In this embodiment, the round display of the "hit" when the "hit" targeted for the V stock effect occurs after the execution of the V stock effect is displayed by succeeding the round display of the previous big win. . Specifically, when the last "jackpot" in which the V stock effect was executed was the "10R jackpot" (that is, the round display of the jackpot round game was displayed from "1ROUND" to "10ROUND" case), the round display is displayed from "11 ROUND" in the small winning game or the big winning round game corresponding to the "hit" that is the target of the V stock effect that occurs thereafter.

<Big hit round after V stock production>
FIG. 9-64 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image and effect sound of each effect related to the round display corresponding to the "hit" occurring after the V stock effect. In this example, the big hit type of the "jackpot" in which the V stock effect is executed is "10 (9) R time-saving big hit via small win", and the big hit type of the "hit" to be the target of the V stock effect is "small hit". It shows an example of "10 (9) R time-saving jackpot" via hit.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-64 (1), when the CPU 103 is executing the round game (final round) in the jackpot game state, the effect control CPU 120 displays the jackpot final round game image on the image display device 5. Display OLI. This jackpot final round game image includes a round display (in this example, the characters “Final ROUND”), a winning ball display (in this example, characters “01950pt”), and first to third selection sections. and is an image containing. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first selection portion in the selected mode, and displays the second selected portion and the third selected portion in the non-selected mode. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays a music display (in this example, an object in the shape of a musical note and the characters “music X”) on the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 .

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first V stock effect, and superimposes the rainbow telop display TI and the V stock number display VNI on the big winning final round game image OLI on the image display device 5 .

Next, the effect image in FIG. 9-64(2) is the same as in FIG. 9-63 described above, so the description is omitted.

After the variable display of the second special symbol is performed one or more times, the winning variable display for V stock is performed. In this variation, it is assumed that the V stock opening effect is executed and the V stock number display VNI at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5 is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-64 (3), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 having received the symbol confirmation designation command displays the symbol display area of the image display device 5. In 5L, 5C and 5R, the final combination of decorative symbols ("333" in this example) is fixed and stopped. At this time, the final combination of small symbols ("333" in this example) is determined and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. That is, the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols that result in a display result of "small win" is determined and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-64 (4), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the small winning game state, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the small winning game image KI. This small winning game image includes a round display (in this example, the characters "11 Round"), the characters "Aim for the V attacker!" It is an image including an image including a jackpot right hitting promotion image and an image including an ally character (A).

Next, at the timing when the game ball enters the V winning area 870 and is detected by the V winning switch 87a, the effect control CPU 120 causes the V winning occurrence display VI to be displayed in the central portion of the screen of the image display device 5. (not shown).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-64 (5), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the round game (first round) in the jackpot game state, the effect control CPU 120 displays a special jackpot round game image on the image display device 5. Display the OBI. This jackpot round game image consists of a round display (characters "12ROUND" in this example), a number of prize balls display (characters "02100pt" in this example), a special jackpot background image, and a rainbow telop display TI. and is an image containing. At this time, since the V stock number is 0, the reduced V stock number display VNI is not displayed in the jackpot round game image. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays a music display (in this example, an object in the shape of a musical note and the characters “music X”) on the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 .

[Time-saving rush production]
In this embodiment, when the performance mode controlled after the big win is the rush mode, it is possible to execute a time-saving rush performance for notifying that the rush mode is controlled during the big win ED period of the big win. A time saving rush production is a series of productions shown below.

First, when the time-saving rush effect is executed, the rush mode explanation image JRI is displayed on the image display device 5 . The rush mode explanation image includes information explaining the game method of the rush mode, a demo icon that suggests to the player that it is not currently controlled in a time-saving state and that there is no need to operate the ball-hitting operation handle 30, and a character. It is an image containing A. At this time, the effect sound F is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the image display device 5 displays the third countdown image CDI3. When the display of the third countdown image is started, the third countdown image is displayed while moving from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 toward the right side of the screen. The third countdown image is an image including the number "3" on the left side of the screen, the number "2" on the center of the screen, and the number "1" on the right side of the screen. Color is added (hereinafter referred to as "colored mode" as appropriate), and numbers "2" and "1" are not colored (hereinafter referred to as "colorless mode"). By displaying the number in a colored manner, the player can recognize that the countdown to the number is progressing. In this case, the player can recognize that the countdown of "321" has progressed to the countdown of "3". At this time, the effect sound F [first effect sound F3] "three" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the image display device 5 displays the second countdown image CDI2. The second countdown image is an image including the number "3" on the left side of the screen, the number "2" on the center of the screen, and the number "1" on the right side of the screen. ' is displayed in a colored manner, and the number '1' is displayed in a non-colored manner. In this case, the player can recognize that the countdown of "321" has progressed to the countdown of "2". At this time, the effect sound F [first effect sound F2] "two" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the image display device 5 displays the first countdown image CDI1. The first countdown image is an image including the number "3" on the left side of the screen, the number "2" on the center of the screen, and the number "1" on the right side of the screen. , and the numbers “1” are displayed in a colored manner. In this case, the player can recognize that the countdown of "321" has progressed to the countdown of "1". At this time, the effect sound F [first effect sound F1] "one" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the start image JSI is displayed on the image display device 5 . The start image is an image containing the characters "START" and a rightward arrow object. When the display of the start image is started, the start image is displayed while moving from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 toward the right side of the screen. At this time, the sound effect F [second sound effect F (scratch: 4 times)] and [second sound effect F and third sound effect F] “s, s, s, s, start” are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Playback output.

<Production example of time saving rush production>
FIGS. 9-65 to 9-67 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect image and an effect sound of each effect related to the time saving rush effect. In this example, an example is shown in which the time saving state is controlled after the time saving rush effect is executed in the jackpot ED period of the big win game state.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-65 (1), at the timing to execute the time saving rush effect in the jackpot ED period of the jackpot game state, the effect control CPU 120 executes the time saving rush effect, and the image display device 5 A rush mode explanation image JRI is displayed. The rush mode explanation image contains information explaining how to play the rush mode (in this example, "Keep hitting right until the powerful RUSH reaches 0!"), and the current time saving state. The image includes a character A and a demonstration icon (in this example, an icon showing the characters "DEMO") that suggests to the player that there is no need to operate the ball-striking operation handle 30 . At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the effect sound F [sound effect] (not shown) from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-65 (2), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the time saving rush effect, and causes the image display device 5 to display the third countdown image CDI3. When the display of the third countdown image is started, the third countdown image is displayed while moving from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 toward the right side of the screen. The third countdown image is an image including the number "3" on the left part of the screen, the number "2" on the center part of the screen, and the number "1" on the right part of the screen. It is displayed in a colored manner, and the numbers "2" and "1" are displayed in an uncolored manner. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the effect sound F [first effect sound F3] "three" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-65 (3), the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the time saving rush effect and causes the image display device 5 to display the second countdown image CDI2. The second countdown image is an image including the number "3" on the left side of the screen, the number "2" on the center of the screen, and the number "1" on the right side of the screen. ' is displayed in a colored manner, and the number '1' is displayed in a non-colored manner. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the effect sound F [first effect sound F2] "two" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-66(4), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the time saving rush effect, and causes the image display device 5 to display the first countdown image CDI1. The first countdown image is an image including the number "3" on the left side of the screen, the number "2" on the center of the screen, and the number "1" on the right side of the screen. , and the numbers “1” are displayed in a colored manner. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the effect sound F [first effect sound F1] "one" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-66(5), the image display device 5 is caused to display the start image JSI. The start image is an image containing the characters "START" and a rightward arrow object. When the display of the start image is started, the start image is displayed while moving from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 toward the right side of the screen. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 outputs the effect sound F [second effect sound F (scratch: 4 times)] and [second effect sound F and third effect sound F] from the speakers 8L and 8R. , s, start" is output.

Thus, when the start image in the time-saving rush effect is displayed, the second effect sound F is scratched and reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R. The effect sound F is reproduced and output as "s, s, s, s, start".

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-66 (6), when it is controlled to the time-saving state and the production mode is controlled to the rush mode: Yume Yume mode, the production control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the background image as the first image. 1 Display the normal time-saving background image. This first normal time-saving background image is an image that includes the characters “powerful RUSH”, the number of remaining time-saving display (in this example, the characters “remaining 7 times”), and the “dream dream mode” emblem EMI1. . At this time, the character (A) CA is not displayed on the first normal time-saving background image.

At this time, based on the fact that the CPU 103 does not execute the variation display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 controls the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 to perform the variation in which the last big hit occurred. The final combination of decoration symbols to be displayed (in this example, "333") is fixed and stopped, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "333") is fixed and stopped. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays four second reserved displays PD2 in the normal mode in the second reserved display area PD2E.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays a special operation prompting display BT2 and a music display (in this example, an object in the shape of a musical note and the letters "music A") on the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5. However, at this time, the effect control CPU 120 does not reproduce and output the music A [music data A] from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-67 (7), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120, based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, displays the image. In the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the device 5, the variable display of decorative patterns is started. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 newly displays the normal mode active display AC corresponding to the variable display currently being executed in the active display area ACE based on the fact that the second reserved memory number has become 3. , the second reserved display PD2 in the normal mode displayed in the second reserved display area PD2E is shifted one by one toward the active display area ACE.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the special operation prompting display BT2 and the music display (in this example, an object simulating a musical note and the letters "music A") on the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5. ing. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the music A [music data A] from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 causes the character (A) CA to appear while moving from the left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 toward the right portion of the screen. In this example, only the upper half of the character (A) CA is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-67(8), the effect control CPU 120 causes the character (A) CA to appear while moving from the left part of the screen of the image display device 5 toward the right part of the screen. , the whole body of the character (A) CA is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 .

[Annihilation SP production]
In this embodiment, in the annihilation SP production of the variation patterns of "SP-X miss" and "SP-X big hit" among the variation patterns with super reach, annihilation is used as an indicator of whether or not the enemy character group Y can be annihilated. A gauge is displayed. Here, in the case of the "SP-X jackpot" variation pattern, the annihilation gauge can reach the maximum value (annihilation icon) within the time limit (operation valid period) by operating (continuously hitting) the operation unit. , the annihilation effect is executed, and it is notified that the final display result is a "jackpot". On the other hand, in the case of the "SP-X miss" variation pattern, by operating (continuously hitting) the operation part, the annihilation gauge can reach the maximum value (annihilation icon) within the time limit (operation valid period). First, the remaining effect is executed, and it is notified that the display result is "loss".

<Production example of annihilation SP production>
FIG. 9-68 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image of each effect related to the annihilation SP effect. In this example, a pattern example in which the remaining effect is executed and a pattern example in which the annihilation effect is executed are shown when the annihilation SP effect is being executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-68 (1), the effect control CPU 120 executes the annihilation SP effect and displays the annihilation SP start image on the image display device 5 at the timing when the variation pattern should develop into super reach. Let The annihilation SP start image is an image in which an annihilation gauge in the initial mode and characters of "annihilate the enemy by repeatedly pressing the button!" are superimposed on the enemy character Y group CYG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-68 (2), the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the annihilation SP effect, and causes the image display device 5 to display the annihilation SP repeated hit image. The annihilation SP continuous hit image is superimposed on the enemy character Y group CYG with an initial mode annihilation gauge GI and an operation prompting display BT prompting the player to operate (continuously hit) the operation unit (push button 31B in this example). This is the displayed image.

In this example, the operation prompting display BT includes the characters "Continuous hits!" and a downward arrow on the right side of the object imitating the push button 31B, and below the object imitating the push button 31B. , to which a time bar indicating the validity period of the operation is added. Here, since the enemy character Y group CYG and the annihilation gauge GI are displayed in the background of the operation prompting display BT, the player can annihilate the enemy character Y group by operating the operation unit (continuously hitting the push button 31B). Operate the control panel in the hope that it will

Note that even if the player does not operate the operating unit, effects (remaining effects, annihilation effects) based on the variation pattern are executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

In this state, when the operation valid period ends, the pattern proceeds to the pattern in which the remaining effect shown in FIG. 9-68 (3A) is executed, or the pattern in which the annihilation effect shown in FIG. 9-68 (3B) is executed.

(Pattern in which residual effect is executed)
As shown in FIG. 9-68 (3A), the effect control CPU 120 executes the remaining effect at the timing when the remaining effect in the variation pattern of "SP-X failure" should be executed, and the image display device 5 remains. A notification image ZI is displayed. The remaining information image is an image in which the character "remaining" is displayed superimposed on the enemy character Y group CYG with the annihilation gauge GI in a mode that does not reach the annihilation icon.

(Pattern in which the annihilation effect is executed)
As shown in FIG. 9-68 (3B), at the timing when the annihilation effect in the variation pattern of "SP-X big hit" should be executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the annihilation effect, and the image display device 5 shows the annihilation effect. A notification image DSI is displayed. The annihilation notification image is an image in which an annihilation gauge GI indicating that the annihilation icon has been reached and the characters "annihilation" are superimposed on a flame image showing that the enemy character group Y is annihilated and burning.

[Sound produced during annihilation SP]
In the present embodiment, when the player's operation of the operating unit is received during the effective operation period of the annihilation SP effect, the effect sound H "Kurae" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. That is, when the operation unit is operated once, the effect sound H "Kurae" is reproduced once from the speakers 8L and 8R. Also, the reproduction output period of the effect sound H is 3S.

In this embodiment, the operation of the operation unit (first operation) by the player is received during the operation effective period of the annihilation SP effect, and the effect sound H "Kurae" is reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R. When the next operation (second operation) of the operation unit is received at a timing before the end of the reproduction output period (3S) of H, the reproduction output of the previously reproduced effect sound H is canceled, Reproduction output of the effect sound H based on the second operation is newly started. This is the same for the third operation after the second operation, the fourth operation after the third operation, and (hereinafter omitted).

By newly reproducing and outputting the effect sound H each time the operation of the operating part by the player is accepted, the player performs pseudo scratch processing at an arbitrary timing and reproduces the effect sound H from the speakers 8L and 8R. can be output. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the annihilation SP effect having the game property of repeatedly hitting the operation unit.

<Example of production sound during annihilation SP production>
FIGS. 9-69 (1) and (2) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect sounds of each effect related to the annihilation SP effect.

As shown in FIG. 9-69 (1), at a predetermined timing (timing: T2) of the operation effective period (period of T1 to TL) during which the annihilation SP effect is executed and the operation prompting display is displayed, the player When receiving the operation of the operation unit by , the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the effect sound H "Kurae" from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this example, the reproduction output period of the effect sound H is 3 seconds.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-69 (2), at a predetermined timing (timing: T2) of the operation valid period (period from T1 to TL) during which the annihilation SP effect is executed and the operation prompting display is displayed, When receiving an operation (first operation) of the operation unit by the player, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the effect sound H from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, while the effect sound H based on the first operation is being reproduced and output (for example, timing T3 after 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the reproduction output of the effect sound H based on the first operation), the next operation is performed. When receiving the operation (second operation) of the part, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the reproduction output of the effect sound H based on the first operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and reproduces and outputs the effect sound H based on the second operation. to start. At this time, only "Ku" of "Kurae" is reproduced and output as the effect sound H based on the first operation.

Next, while the effect sound H based on the second operation is being reproduced and output (for example, timing T4 when 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the reproduction output of the effect sound H based on the second operation: T4), the next operation is performed. When receiving the operation (third operation) of the part, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the reproduction output of the effect sound H based on the second operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and also reproduces and outputs the effect sound H based on the third operation. to start. At this time, the effect sound H based on the second operation is reproduced and output only for "ku" in "kurae".

Next, while the effect sound H based on the third operation is being reproduced and output (for example, timing T5 when 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the reproduction output of the effect sound H based on the third operation: T5), the next operation is performed. When receiving the operation (fourth operation) of the part, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the reproduction output of the effect sound H based on the third operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and reproduces and outputs the effect sound H based on the fourth operation. to start. At this time, the effect sound H based on the third operation is reproduced and output only for "ku" in "kurae".

Next, while the sound effect H based on the fourth operation is being reproduced and output (for example, timing T6 after 0.5 seconds have passed since the sound effect H started to be reproduced and output based on the fourth operation), the next operation is performed. When receiving the operation (fifth operation) of the part, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the reproduction output of the effect sound H based on the fourth operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and reproduces and outputs the effect sound H based on the fifth operation. to start. At this time, only "Ku" of "Kurae" is reproduced and output as the effect sound H based on the fourth operation. Then, the effect sound H based on the fifth operation is reproduced and output for 3 seconds.

In this way, the effect sound H is scratched and reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R each time the player operates the operation unit, so the effect sound H is "ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku, ku,". is played back.

[Big hit notification effect when hitting right]
In this embodiment, in the variation display when the rush mode is controlled, if the variation pattern is "normal reach jackpot", the display result is a "jackpot". It is possible. As right-hand hitting big win notification performances, there are a first right hitting big win reporting performance, a second right hitting big winning reporting performance, and a third right hitting big win reporting performance. In this embodiment, when the production mode is controlled to the rush mode, it is appropriately referred to as "right hitting".

[Big hit notification effect at the time of the first right hit]
The first right-hand hit jackpot notification effect is a case where the production mode is rush mode: dream dream mode and the display result (jackpot type) is either ``3R jackpot'' or ``10R jackpot'', and fluctuates. When the pattern is "normal reach big hit", it is a kind of big hit notification effect executed when notifying the display result. The first right hit jackpot notification effect is a decorative pattern indicating that the display result is "hit" in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R at a predetermined trigger (operation of the push button 31B, elapse of a predetermined period, etc.). combination is stopped.

In the first right-handed jackpot informing effect, the non-scratched effect sound D1 [first effect sound D1 and second effect sound D1] ``Victory'' (character A voice) is reproduced and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

<Production example of big hit notification production at the time of the first right hit>
FIG. 9-70 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image and an effect sound of each effect associated with the first right-handed jackpot notification effect.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-70 (1), in the ready-to-win state by stopping and displaying decorative symbols "3" in the symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5, the operation promotion in the variation pattern is performed. At the timing when the display should be displayed, the effect control CPU 120 displays the operation prompting display BT prompting the player to operate the operation unit (in this example, the push button 31B) in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Other effect images are the same as those in FIG. 9-59 (3A), so the description is omitted.

In this example, the operation prompting display BT includes the characters "Press!!" It is formed by adding a time bar indicating the validity period.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the effect sound I1 "press" (character A voice) from the speakers 8L and 8R. Rush mode during control: Since the Yume Yume mode is an effect in which character A mainly appears, the effect sound when the operation prompting display is displayed is the effect sound related to character A (the character voice of character A). It has become.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-70 (2), when the player operates the operating unit, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first right hit jackpot notification effect, and displays the symbol display area of the image display device 5. , the combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "333") with a display result of "hit" is stopped and displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the effect sound D1 [the first effect sound D1 and the second effect sound D1] "Victory" (character A voice) from the speakers 8L and 8R. Rush mode under control: Since the Yume Yume mode is an effect in which the character A mainly appears, the effect sound when the display result is announced as "hit" is the effect sound related to the character A ( character voice of character A).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-70 (3), when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 causes the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 to display The combination of decorative symbols ("333" in this example) that results in a "hit" result is determined and stopped. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small patterns ("333" in this example) is confirmed and stopped. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area ACE to erase the active display AC in response to the fact that the variable display is not being executed at present. Also, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the reproduction output of any of the effect sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Thus, as shown in FIG. 9-70, when the first right-handed jackpot notification effect is executed, the effect sound D1 "Victory" that does not scratch any effect sound is reproduced and output.

[Special jackpot notification effect when hitting the first right]
The special jackpot annunciation performance at the time of the first right-hand hit is when the performance mode is the rush mode: dream dream mode, the display result (jackpot type) is "10R jackpot", and the variation pattern is "normal reach jackpot". In some cases, it is a kind of big hit notification effect that is executed when notifying the display result. The special jackpot notification effect at the time of the first right hit is a decoration indicating that the display result is "hit" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R at a predetermined trigger (operation of the push button 31B, elapse of a predetermined period, etc.). The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed.

In the special jackpot annunciation effect at the time of the first right hit, the sound effect D1 [the first sound effect D1 (scratch: twice) and the second sound effect D1] "Vi, Vi, Victory" (Character A voice) is played by speakers 8L and 8R. Playback output from

<Production example of special jackpot notification production at the time of the first right hit>
FIG. 9-71 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image and an effect sound of each effect related to the special jackpot notification effect at the time of the first right hit.

First, the effect image and effect sound in FIG. 9-71(1) are the same as those in FIG. 9-70(1) described above, so the description is omitted.

Next, the effect image in FIG. 9-71(2) is the same as that in FIG. 9-70(2) described above, so the description is omitted. At this time, the production control CPU 120 reproduces the production sound D1 [first production sound D1 (scratch: twice) and second production sound D1] "Vi, Vi, Victory" (character A voice) from the speakers 8L and 8R. output. Rush mode under control: Since the Yume Yume mode is an effect in which the character A mainly appears, the effect sound when the display result is announced as "hit" is the effect sound related to the character A ( character voice of character A).

Next, the effect image and effect sound in FIG. 9-71(3) are the same as those in FIG. 9-70(3) described above, so description thereof is omitted.

In this way, as shown in FIG. 9-71, when the first right-handed special jackpot notification effect is executed, the first effect sound D1 is scratched twice and reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R. , and the effect sound D1 is reproduced and output as "Vi, Vi, Victory" (character A voice).

[Big hit notification effect when hitting the second right]
The second right hit jackpot notification effect is when the production mode is rush mode: Nana mode, the display result (jackpot type) is either "3R jackpot" or "10R jackpot", and the variation pattern is In the case of "normal reach big hit", it is a kind of big hit notification effect executed when notifying the display result. The second right hit jackpot notification effect is a decorative pattern indicating that the display result is "hit" in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R at a predetermined trigger (operation of the push button 31B, elapse of a predetermined period, etc.). combination is stopped.

In the second right-handed jackpot notification effect, the non-scratched effect sound D2 [the first effect sound D2 and the second effect sound D2] "Victory" (character B voice) is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

<Production example of the big hit notification production at the time of the second right hit>
FIG. 9-72 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image and an effect sound of each effect related to the second right hitting jackpot notification effect.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-72 (1), in the ready-to-win state by stopping and displaying decorative symbols "3" in the symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5, the operation promotion in the variation pattern is performed. At the timing when the display should be displayed, the effect control CPU 120 displays the operation prompting display BT prompting the player to operate the operation unit (in this example, the push button 31B) in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Other effect images are the same as those in FIG. 9-59 (3B), so the description is omitted.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the effect sound I2 "press" (character B voice) from the speakers 8L and 8R. Rush mode during control: Since the Nana mode is an effect in which character B mainly appears, the effect sound when the operation prompting display is displayed is the effect sound related to character B (the character voice of character B). ing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-72 (2), when the player operates the operation unit, the effect control CPU 120 executes the second right-handed hitting big hit notification effect, and displays the symbol display area of the image display device 5. , the combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "333") with a display result of "hit" is stopped and displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the effect sound D2 [the first effect sound D2 and the second effect sound D2] "Victory" (character B voice) from the speakers 8L and 8R. Rush mode during control: Since the Nana mode is an effect in which character B appears mainly, the effect sound when the display result is announced as "hit" is the effect sound related to character B (character B character voice).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-72 (3), when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 causes the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 to display The combination of decorative symbols ("333" in this example) that results in a "hit" result is determined and stopped. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small patterns ("333" in this example) is confirmed and stopped. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area ACE to erase the active display AC in response to the fact that the variable display is not being executed at present. Also, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the reproduction output of any of the effect sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, as shown in FIG. 9-72, when the second right hit jackpot notification effect is executed, the effect sound D2 "Victory" (character B voice) that does not scratch any effect sound is reproduced and output. ing.

[Special jackpot notification effect when hitting the second right]
The second right-hand hitting special jackpot notification performance is when the performance mode is rush mode: Nana mode, the display result (jackpot type) is "10R jackpot", and the variation pattern is "normal reach jackpot". Secondly, it is a kind of big hit notification effect executed when notifying the display result. The special jackpot notification effect at the time of the second right hit is a decoration indicating that the display result is "hit" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R with a predetermined trigger (operation of the push button 31B, elapse of a predetermined period, etc.). The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed.

In the second right-hand hit special jackpot notification effect, sound effects D2 [first sound effect D2 (scratch: twice) and second sound effect D2] "Vi, Vi, Victory" (character B voice) are played by speakers 8L and 8R. is played back from the

<Production example of special jackpot notification production when hitting the second right>
FIG. 9-73 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image and an effect sound of each effect related to the special jackpot notification effect at the time of the second right hit.

First, the effect image and effect sound in FIG. 9-73(1) are the same as those in FIG. 9-72(1) described above, so the description is omitted.

Next, the effect image in FIG. 9-73(2) is the same as in FIG. 9-72(2) described above, so the description is omitted. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces the effect sound D2 [the first effect sound D1 (scratch: twice) and the second effect sound D2] "Vi, Vi, Victory" (character B voice) from the speakers 8L and 8R. output. Rush mode during control: Since the Nana mode is an effect in which character B appears mainly, the effect sound when the display result is announced as "hit" is the effect sound related to character B (character B character voice).

Next, the effect image and effect sound in FIG. 9-73(3) are the same as those in FIG. 9-72(3) described above, so description thereof is omitted.

In this way, as shown in FIG. 9-73, when the second right-handed special jackpot notification effect is executed, the first effect sound D2 is scratched twice and reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R. , and the effect sound D2 is reproduced and output as "Vi, Vi, Victory".

[Big hit notification effect at the time of the third right hit]
The third right hit jackpot notification performance is a variation pattern when the performance mode is rush mode: jam mode and the display result (jackpot type) is either "3R jackpot" or "10R jackpot". is a kind of jackpot notification effect executed when notifying the display result when is a "normal reach jackpot". The third right-hand hit jackpot notification effect is a decorative pattern indicating that the display result is "hit" in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R at a predetermined trigger (operation of the push button 31B, elapse of a predetermined period, etc.). combination is stopped.

In the third right-handed jackpot notification effect, the non-scratched effect sound D3 [first effect sound D3 and second effect sound D3] "Victory" (character C voice) is reproduced and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

<Production example of big hit notification production at the time of the third right hit>
FIG. 9-74 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image and an effect sound of each effect related to the third right hitting big hit notification effect.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-74 (1), in the ready-to-win state by stopping display of decorative symbols "3" in the symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5, operation promotion in the variation pattern is performed. At the timing when the display should be displayed, the effect control CPU 120 displays the operation prompting display BT prompting the player to operate the operation unit (in this example, the push button 31B) in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Other effect images are the same as those in FIG. 9-59 (3C), so the description is omitted.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the effect sound I3 "press" (character C voice) from the speakers 8L and 8R. Rush mode during control: Jam mode is an effect in which character C appears mainly. It's becoming

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-74 (2), when the player operates the operation unit, the effect control CPU 120 executes the third right hit jackpot notification effect, and displays the symbol display area of the image display device 5. , the combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "333") with a display result of "hit" is stopped and displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the effect sound D3 [the first effect sound D3 and the second effect sound D3] "Victory" (character C voice) from the speakers 8L and 8R. Rush mode during control: Jam mode is an effect in which character C appears mainly. C's character voice).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-74 (3), when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 causes the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 to display The combination of decorative symbols ("333" in this example) that results in a "hit" result is determined and stopped. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small patterns ("333" in this example) is confirmed and stopped. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area ACE to erase the active display AC in response to the fact that the variable display is not being executed at present. Also, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the reproduction output of any of the effect sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, as shown in FIG. 9-74, when the third right hit jackpot notification effect is executed, the effect sound D3 "Victory" (character C voice) that does not scratch any effect sound is reproduced and output. ing.

[Special jackpot notification effect when hitting the third right]
The special jackpot annunciation performance at the time of the third right-hand hit is when the performance mode is the rush mode: jam mode, the display result (jackpot type) is ``10R jackpot'', and the variation pattern is ``normal reach jackpot''. In the case, it is a kind of big hit notification effect that is executed when notifying the display result. The special jackpot notification effect at the time of the second right hit is a decoration indicating that the display result is "hit" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R with a predetermined trigger (operation of the push button 31B, elapse of a predetermined period, etc.). The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed.

In the third right-hand hit special jackpot notification effect, sound effects D3 [first sound effect D3 (scratch: twice) and second sound effect D3] "Vi, Vi, Victory" (character C voice) are played by speakers 8L and 8R. is played back from the

<Production example of special jackpot notification production when hitting the third right>
FIG. 9-75 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image and an effect sound of each effect associated with the third right-handed special jackpot notification effect.

First, the effect image and effect sound in FIG. 9-75(1) are the same as those in FIG. 9-74(1) described above, so description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the effect image in FIG. 9-75(2) is the same as in FIG. 9-74(2) described above, so the description is omitted. At this time, the production control CPU 120 reproduces the production sound D3 [first production sound D3 (scratch: twice) and second production sound D3] "Vi, Vi, Victory" (character C voice) from the speakers 8L and 8R. output. Rush mode during control: Jam mode is an effect in which character C appears mainly. C's character voice).

Next, the effect image and effect sound in FIG. 9-75(3) are the same as those in FIG. 9-74(3) described above, so description thereof is omitted.

In this way, as shown in FIG. 9-75, when the third right hitting special jackpot notification effect is executed, the first effect sound D3 is scratched twice and reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R. , and the effect sound D3 is reproduced and output as "Vi, Vi, Victory".

[Playback output period of effect sound in jackpot notification effect]
FIG. 9-76 is a diagram showing a table for explaining the reproduction output period of the effect sound in the big-hit notification effect (hereinafter referred to as the "big-win notification effect sound reproduction output period table"). The reproduction output period table for the jackpot notification sound includes, for each type of jackpot notification effect, the type of sound effect, the composition type of the sound effect, the reproduction output period for each composition type of the sound effect, and the total output for each type of sound effect. period is indicated. FIG. 9-76 shows specific examples of the type of sound effect, the type of sound effect composition, the reproduction output period for each type of sound effect structure, and the total output period for each type of sound effect, as shown below. ing.

・ First normal jackpot notification effect:
First sound effect C1 (0.25 s) x 4 + (first sound effect C1 + second sound effect C1 (5.25 s)) = total output period (6.25 s)

・ Second normal jackpot notification effect:
First sound effect C2 (0.25 s) x 4 + (first sound effect C2 + second sound effect C2 (5.25 s)) = total output period (6.25 s)

・ Third normal jackpot notification effect:
First sound effect C3 (0.25 s) x 4 + (first sound effect C3 + second sound effect C3 (5.25 s)) = total output period (6.25 s)

・ Jackpot notification effect at the time of the first right hit:
First sound effect D1 + Second sound effect D1 (5.25 s) = Total output period (5.25 s)

・ Special jackpot notification effect at the time of the first right hit:
First sound effect D1 (0.25 s) x 2 + (first sound effect D1 + second sound effect D1 (5.25 s)) = total output period (5.75 s)

・ Jackpot notification effect at the time of the second right hit:
First sound effect D2 + second sound effect D2 (5.25 s) = total output period (5.25 s)

・ Special jackpot notification effect when hitting the second right:
First sound effect D2 (0.25 s) x 2 + (first sound effect D2 + second sound effect D2 (5.25 s)) = total output period (5.75 s)

・ Jackpot notification effect at the time of the third right hit:
First sound effect D3 + second sound effect D3 (5.25 s) = total output period (5.25 s)

・ Special jackpot notification effect at the time of the third right hit:
First sound effect D3 (0.25 s) x 2 + (first sound effect D3 + second sound effect D3 (5.25 s)) = total output period (5.75 s)

[A series of production examples in this embodiment]
Next, an example of an effect when a big win occurs in the challenge mode after the first win occurs in the normal mode, and V stock occurs during the big win will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-77 to 9-83.

Figures 9-77 to 9-79 are time charts showing the execution timing of each related effect when a big win occurs in the challenge mode after the first win in the normal mode, and V stock occurs during the big win. FIG. 9-80 to FIG. 9-83 show an example of effect images related to when a big win occurs in the challenge mode after the first win in the normal mode, and V stock occurs during the big win. It is an explanatory diagram.

In this example, when the production mode is controlled to the normal mode, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in which the display result is "big hit" and the variation pattern is "SP-C1 big hit", and this variation In the display, a change precursor effect, a special change effect, a story SP development effect, a third normal jackpot notification effect, and the like are executed.

In addition, when the production mode is controlled to the challenge mode, the display result of the first rotation of the time saving is "small hit", and the display result of one of the holding memories generated during this time saving state is also "small". "Hit", and the first V-stock effect, the time-saving rush effect, etc. shall be executed in the big hit that occurs during the challenge mode.

Also, when the effect mode is controlled to the rush mode, the second V-stock effect, the first right-handed jackpot notification effect, and the like are executed. In addition, it is assumed that a V winning occurs in a small winning game state to be a target of V stock, the game is controlled to a big winning game state, and a big winning type notification effect or the like is executed.

First, the effect image and effect sound (FIG. 9-77: T1) in FIG. 9-80(1) are the same as those in FIG. 9-19(1) described above, so the description is omitted.

Next, the effect image and effect sound (FIG. 9-77: T2) in FIG. 9-80(2) are the same as those in FIG. 9-19(2) described above, so description thereof is omitted.

Next, the effect image and effect sound (FIG. 9-77: T3) in FIG. 9-80(3) are the same as those in FIG. 9-20(5) described above, so description thereof is omitted.

Next, the effect images and effect sounds (Fig. 9-77: T5, T6, T7, T8) in Figures 9-80 (4) to (7) are shown in Figures 9-27 (1), (4), ( 7) and (8) are the same, so the description is omitted. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area ACE to display a red mode active display AC2.

9-80 (8) and 9-81 (9), the effect images and sound effects (Fig. 9-77: T9, T10) are the same as those shown in Figs. 9-38 (1) and (2). Therefore, the explanation is omitted. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area ACE to display a red mode active display AC2.

Next, the effect image and effect sound (FIG. 9-77: T11) in FIG. 9-81 (10) are the same as those in FIG. 9-41 (11) described above, so the description is omitted. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area ACE to display a red mode active display AC2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-81 (11), when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 causes the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5 to A combination of small symbols (“222” in this example) that results in a “big hit” display result is confirmed and stopped (FIG. 9-77: T12). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display AC from the active display area ACE based on the fact that the variable display is not currently being executed.

Next, the effect image and effect sound (FIG. 9-78: T13) in FIG. 9-81 (12) are the same as those in FIG. 9-49 (3A) described above, so description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the effect image and effect sound (FIG. 9-78: T14) in FIG. 9-81 (13) are the same as those in FIG.

Next, the effect image and effect sound (FIG. 9-78: T15) in FIG. 9-81 (14) are the same as those in FIG. 9-12 (3) described above, so the description is omitted.

9-81 (15) and (16), the effect images and sound effects (Fig. 9-78: T22, T23) are the same as Fig. 9-45 (B): (1) and (2). Therefore, the explanation is omitted.

Next, the effect image and effect sound (FIG. 9-78: T24) in FIG. 9-82 (17) are the same as those in FIG. 9-49 (1) described above, so the description is omitted.

Next, the effect image and effect sound (FIG. 9-78: T25) in FIG. 9-82 (18) are the same as those in FIG. 9-51 (2) described above, so the description is omitted.

Next, the effect image and effect sound (FIG. 9-78: T26) in FIG. 9-82 (19) are the same as those in FIG. 9-53 (9) described above, so the description is omitted.

Next, the effect image and effect sound (FIG. 9-78: T27) in FIG. 9-82 (20) are the same as those in FIG. 9-65 (1) described above, so description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the effect image and effect sound (FIG. 9-78: T28) in FIG. 9-82 (21) are the same as those in FIG. 9-12 (5) described above, so description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the effect image and effect sound (FIG. 9-79: T29) in FIG. 9-82 (22) are the same as those in FIG. 9-64 (2) described above, so description thereof will be omitted. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays three second reserved displays in the normal mode on the special second reserved display guide PD2G of the second reserved display area PD2E based on the fact that the number of second reserved memories is 3. I am letting

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-82 (23), at the timing when the decorative pattern in the variation pattern should be stopped and displayed, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display result in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. A combination of decorative symbols ("333" in this example) that results in a "small hit" is stopped and displayed (FIG. 9-79: T32). At this time, the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. In addition, since the V stock release effect has been executed, the V stock number display VNI at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5 has been erased. Other effects images and effects sounds are the same as those shown in FIG.

Next, the effect image and effect sound (FIG. 9-79: T35) in FIG. 9-82 (24) are the same as those in FIG. 9-64 (4) described above, so description thereof is omitted.

Next, the effect image and effect sound (FIG. 9-79: T36) in FIG. 9-83 (25) are the same as those in FIG.

Next, the effect image and effect sound (FIG. 9-79: T37) in FIG. 9-83 (26) are the same as those in FIG. 9-49 (1) described above, so description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the effect image and effect sound (FIG. 9-79: T39) in FIG. 9-83 (27) are the same as those in FIG. 9-64 (5) described above, so description thereof will be omitted.

(Effect 1)
As shown in FIGS. 9-28 to 9-30, in the story SP development rendering, a character A whose display color is yellow and a purple character A whose display color is in a complementary color contrast relationship with yellow are alternately displayed. When displayed twice, the scratch processing of scratching the first effect sound G "pa" four times is executed, and the effect sound G "pa, pa, pa, pa, powerful" is reproduced and output.

According to such a configuration, when the first effect sound G is reproduced a plurality of times in the story SP development effect, the character A whose display color is yellow is displayed according to the reproduction output of the first effect sound G. and a purple character A whose display color is in a relationship of complementary color contrast with yellow are displayed a plurality of times to create a sense of unity between voice and image in the game machine, and display the character A in a relationship of complementary color contrast. By alternately displaying the colors, the display color of the character A can be displayed more vividly, so that the interest can be improved when the story SP development effect is executed.

(Effect 2)
As shown in FIGS. 9-50, 9-51 to 9-53, and 9-54 to 9-57, the first V stock effect (first holding continuous effect) is executed in the jackpot game state. When not scratched, music A (music B or music C) that has not been scratched is reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R, while the first V-stock effect is being executed in the jackpot game state. , the music piece X that has undergone scratch processing is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

According to such a configuration, when the first holding consecutive production is executed during the big win game, what is the normal music (music A to music C) reproduced and output in the big winning game in which the first holding consecutive production is not executed? By reproducing and outputting a different special music piece (music piece X), the special feeling of the first holding series effect can be improved. In addition, part of the music ([music data X1] of music X) that is reproduced and output when it is suggested that a holding series has occurred is scratched, so that the first holding series production is performed. It is possible to impress the player with the music when it is performed.

(Effect 3)
As shown in FIGS. 9-50, 9-51 to 9-53, and 9-54 to 9-57, the first V stock effect (first holding continuous effect) is executed in the jackpot game state. While the music A (music B or music C) is reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R as the music during the big win game when not played, the first V stock effect is executed in the big win game state. Meanwhile, music X is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R as music during the jackpot game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-62, when the time saving state is controlled and the effect mode is controlled to the rush mode, when the second V stock effect (second holding continuous effect) is not executed, the speaker From 8L and 8R, music A (music B or music C) is reproduced and output as music during the rush mode. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-63, when it is controlled to the time saving state and the production mode is controlled to the rush mode, when the second V stock production (second holding continuous production) is being executed, Music X is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the music during the rush mode.

According to such a configuration, when the first holding consecutive production is executed during the big win game, what is the normal music (music A to music C) reproduced and output in the big winning game in which the first holding consecutive production is not executed? By reproducing and outputting a different special music piece (music piece X), the special feeling of the first holding series effect can be improved. In addition, when the holding consecutive production (first holding consecutive production, second holding consecutive production) is executed, common music is played from the jackpot game to the game in the time saving state (rush mode, appropriately referred to as "time saving game"). By reproducing and outputting, it is possible to prevent the loss of interest due to the music being changed when switching from the jackpot game to the time saving state.

(Effect 3-1)
As shown in FIG. 9-50, in the jackpot game state, when the first V stock effect (first holding continuous effect) is not being executed, any one of song A, song B or song C is selected as the song during the jackpot game. can be selected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-62, when the time saving state is controlled and the effect mode is controlled to the rush mode, when the second V stock effect (second holding continuous effect) is not executed, the rush Any one of music A, music B, and music C can be selected as the music in the mode.

According to such a configuration, the music which is the dedicated music when the V stock effect is executed in the normal jackpot game period in which the V stock effect is not executed or in the normal time-saving game period in which the V stock effect is not executed. By not reproducing and outputting X, the V stock effect is executed, and the feeling of specialness and premier feeling when the music piece X is reproduced and output can be improved.

(Effect 3-2)
As shown in FIGS. 9-51 to 9-53 and 9-63, a rainbow-colored telop display TI displayed on the image display device 5 when the first V stock effect is executed during the jackpot game. , the V stock number display VNI, and the music X reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R are the rainbow-colored telop display TI displayed on the image display device 5 when the second V stock effect is executed during the time-saving game. , the V stock number display VNI, and the music piece X reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to seamlessly show the performance from the jackpot game to the time-saving game, to emphasize the continuous occurrence of "hit", and to improve the special feeling when the holding series is occurring. can.

(Effect 3-3)
As shown in FIG. 9-64, when the hit type of the previous "jackpot" in which the V stock effect (first holding continuous effect) was executed was "10R jackpot" (that is, the round display of the jackpot round game is displayed from "1ROUND" to "10ROUND"), the round display will be displayed from "11ROUND" in the small hit game or big hit round game corresponding to the "hit" that is the target of the V stock effect that occurs after that. ing.

According to such a configuration, in this pachinko game machine 1 in which the maximum number of rounds in one "jackpot" is "10", the number of rounds of "11" or more, which is impossible in a normal jackpot game, is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a special feeling in the holding group, and to show a seamless flow from the previous "big win" to the "big win" based on the holding group, so that the big win seems to continue. can be shown, and the amusement of the jackpot can be improved when the holding series is executed.

(Effect 3-4)
As shown in FIGS. 9-53 (8) and (9), at a predetermined trigger (operation of the push button 31B, elapse of a predetermined period of time, etc.), the number of V stocks (holding consecutive V stock number display VNI ("V STOCK×1" in this example), which is information suggesting the number of stocks, is displayed. In addition, at the timing when the round game (first round) in the jackpot game state is started, a reduced V stock number display VNI (in this example, “V STOCK×1”) is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. is displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of accomplishment and a sense of security by notifying the number of reserved memories that are "wins" in the reserved memories.

(Effect 3-5)
As shown in FIG. 9-49, regardless of whether or not the V stock effect (holding continuous effect) is executed, the big win type notification effect is executed during the big win FF period in the big win game state. When the third big win type "V STOCK BONUS" is announced in the big win type notification performance, the first V stock performance (first holding continuous performance) is always executed within the big win FF period, and the first big win type in the big win type reporting performance. Even when "BONUS" or the second big win type "MAX BONUS" is reported, there is a possibility that the first V stock effect will be executed within the big win RD period.

In this way, before the first holding continuous performance is executed, the big win type notification performance is executed to incite whether or not the first holding continuous performance is executed, so that the player can respond to the big win type reporting performance. can be made to pay attention, and the amusement of the jackpot game state can be improved.

(Effect 3-6)
As shown in FIGS. 9-62 and 9-63, in the time-saving state in which the second V stock effect (second holding continuous effect) is not executed, a simple active display guide is displayed in the active display area, and the second While none of the guides are displayed in the reserved display area, in the time-saving state in which the second V-stock effect is being executed, a splendid special active display guide ACG is displayed in the active display area, and a splendid special active display guide ACG is displayed in the second reserved display area. A special second pending display guide PD2G is displayed. Further, in the time-saving state in which the second V stock effect is not being executed, the background image does not include the rainbow-colored telop display TI, while in the time-saving state in which the second V stock effect is being executed, the rainbow-colored telop is displayed in the background image. Indication TI is included.

According to such a configuration, depending on whether or not the second V stock effect is executed, not only the effect image related to the variable display displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, but also the interface is changed to change the V stock ( It is possible to emphasize the special feeling of the occurrence of the holding group.

(Effect 3-7)
As shown in FIGS. 9-8 and 9-51 to 9-53, when the first V stock effect (first holding consecutive effect) is being executed during the jackpot game, playback is performed from the speakers 8L and 8R. [Music data X1] "We" (impact: strong) is reproduced and output four times in succession for the music X to be output. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-50, when the first V stock effect (first holding consecutive effect) is not executed during the jackpot game, the music A (music B or Music C) (impact: weak) has not been scratched.

According to such a configuration, V-stock is generated by reproducing and outputting specially processed (scratched) voice that is different from the normal voice structure when V-stock (holding) is occurring. It can improve the feeling of specialness in what you are doing. [Music data X1] ``we'' (impact: strong) at the beginning of the music piece X is repeatedly reproduced and output to strengthen the impact of the sound at the beginning of the music piece, and when V stock occurs in the player. Since listening to this music can motivate the player to play the game, it is possible to promote the operation.

(Effect 3-8)
As described above, when the scratch processing is executed and the first effect sound "Pa" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R four times in a row, the game effect lamp 9 is set at the reproduction output timing of the first effect sound. It is possible to emit light together.

According to such a configuration, since the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R and the effect using the effect device (game effect lamp) different from the speaker 8L and 8R are mutually related, the effect of scratch processing is improved. At the same time, it is possible to realize an effect that appeals not only to the auditory sense of the player but also to the visual sense.

(Effect 3-9)
As shown in FIG. 9-8, music pieces X of "CH04" and "CH05" are composed of [music data X1] and [music data X2]. Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-51 to 9-53, when the first V stock effect (first holding consecutive effect) is being executed during the jackpot game, the music piece X reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. After executing the scratch process in which [music data X1] "We" (impact: strong) is reproduced and output four times in a row, [music data X1] and [music data X2] "Welcome Lucky (hereinafter omitted) ” is being played back.

According to such a configuration, by continuously reproducing and outputting the first audio data among the first audio data and the second audio data forming the audio, the audio control during the scratch processing can be performed. Processing burden can be reduced.

(Effect 3-10)
As shown in FIG. 9-8, the basic sound volume of [music data X1] and [music data X2] of music X are both set to a fixed value of "3". When [music data X1] and [music data X2] "Welcome Lucky (hereinafter omitted)" are reproduced after the scratch processing is executed to reproduce and output continuously, when the volume value is constant, the music The output sound volume of each piece of music data that constitutes X is constant.

According to such a configuration, since the basic sound volume is constant, the output sound volume of each piece of music data constituting the music piece X is constant, so that it is possible to prevent the clarity of a specific portion of the music piece X from deteriorating. .

(Effect 3-11)
As shown in FIGS. 9-51 to 9-53, when the first V stock effect (first holding continuous effect) is being executed during the jackpot game, the effect sound A reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R is [First effect sound A] Scratch processing is executed in which "b" is reproduced and output four times in succession.

Further, as described above, when the [first effect sound A] is reproduced four times in succession with scratch processing, the first [first effect sound A] (basic volume: 1), 2 [1st effect sound A] (basic volume: 2), 3rd [1st effect sound A] (basic volume: 3), 4th [1st effect sound A] (basic volume: 4) It is possible to increase the basic sound volume and the output sound volume as the number of outputs is increased.

According to such a configuration, when the first V-stock effect (first holding continuous effect) is executed, the output volume of the effect sound A to be reproduced and output gradually increases, thereby increasing the interest of the first V-stock effect. can be improved.

(Effect 3-12)
As described above, when the [second sound effect A] is reproduced after the [first sound effect A] accompanied by scratch processing, the channel setting ratio of the [second sound effect A] “istock” is gradually decreased from "1 (100%)" to "0 (0%)" to fade out, it is possible to decrease the output sound volume over time.

According to such a configuration, the output sound volume of the effect sound reproduced and output in the first V stock effect (first holding series effect) is not suddenly reduced, but is gradually reduced, thereby providing the player with a V stock (holding effect). It is possible to make the player feel a lingering feeling of joy at the occurrence of the continuation, and prevent the first V-stock presentation from being less interesting.

(Effect 4)
As shown in FIG. 9-50, in the jackpot game state, when the first V stock effect (first holding continuous effect, first fixed effect) is not executed, a special An operation prompting display BT2 is displayed, and any one of music A, music B, and music C can be selected as music during the jackpot game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-53, in the jackpot game state, when the first V stock effect (first holding continuous effect, first fixed effect) is being executed, the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 , the special operation prompting display BT2 is not displayed, and a song other than the song X cannot be selected as a song during the jackpot game.

According to such a configuration, when the first V stock effect is being executed, the music piece X dedicated to the occurrence of the V stock is reproduced and output, thereby improving the special feeling of the first V stock effect. In addition, by restricting the selection of music other than music X when the first V stock effect is being executed, the user's interest in the first V stock effect will decrease due to the operation of selecting the music. can be prevented.

(Effect 4-1)
As shown in FIG. 9-50, in the jackpot game state, when the first V stock effect (first holding continuous effect, first fixed effect) is not being executed, at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5, A special operation prompting display BT2 and a music display (a note-like object and the name of the music) are displayed. Thereby, the player can select any one of the music A, the music B, and the music C as the music during the jackpot game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-53, in the jackpot game state, when the first V stock effect (first holding continuous effect, first fixed effect) is being executed, the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 , the special operation promotion display BT2 is not displayed, and only the music display is displayed. As a result, the player cannot select a song other than the song X as a song during the jackpot game.

According to such a configuration, when the first V stock effect is being executed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to the display of the special operation prompting display BT2, which is information unrelated to the first V stock effect.

(Effect 4-2)
As shown in FIGS. 9-54 to 9-57, in the jackpot round game, when the normal jackpot background image (background image including the mountain, the sun, and musical notes) is displayed on the image display device 5, the first V When the stock effect (first holding continuous effect, first fixed effect) is executed, the normal jackpot background image is erased, and effect images related to the first V stock effect (V stock display VSI1, VSI2, VSI3, operation promotion) are executed. Display BT and V stock number display VSI) are displayed.

According to such a configuration, in the jackpot round game, the sudden execution of the first V-stock effect can surprise the player and improve the interest of the jackpot game.

(Effect 4-3)
As shown in FIGS. 9-51 to 9-57, when the first V stock effect is executed, the [first effect sound A] “bu” and the effect sound A reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R [Second effect sound A] As information related to "istock", a first V stock display VSI1 composed of the letter "V" and a second V stock display composed of the letter "V" are displayed on the image display device 5. VSI2 and a third V stock display VSI3 consisting of the characters "V STOCK" are displayed.

According to such a configuration, the occurrence of V stock can be appealed visually as well as audibly.

(Effect 4-4)
As shown in FIGS. 9-54 to 9-57, music A is played back from speakers 8L and 8R before the first V stock effect of the first round (round display=2ROUND) during the jackpot game is executed. When the first V stock effect of the second round (round display=3ROUND) during the jackpot game is executed, the music X is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Then, even after the display of the V stock number display VNI in the central part of the screen of the image display device 5 in the first V stock effect of the third round (round display=4ROUND) during the jackpot game is completed, the music is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. X is continuously reproduced and output. At this time, changing the music is restricted.

According to such a configuration, the music piece X that was reproduced and output when the first V stock effect was started is continuously reproduced and output, thereby continuously informing the player that the V stock is occurring. The notification can be made and the special feeling of the jackpot round game can be improved.

(Effect 4-5)
As described above, when the first V stock effect is executed, the channel setting ratio of the effect sound A reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R is set to 100%. On the other hand, the channel setting ratio of music X reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R is set to 20%.

According to such a configuration, the clarity of the music piece X can be lowered, the clarity of the production sound A can be improved, and the production effect of the production sound characteristic of the first V stock production can be improved. .

(Effect 4-6)
As shown in FIG. 9-8, when the effect sound A of the first V stock is reproduced, [first sound effect A1] and [second sound effect A1] (hereinafter referred to as “sound effect A1” as appropriate) ) is reproduced, it suggests that the jackpot type of the retained memory to be V-stocked is “10R jackpot”, and [first sound effect A2] and [first sound effect A2] and [first sound effect A2] 2 sound effect A2] (hereinafter referred to as "sound effect A2" as appropriate) is reproduced, the jackpot type of the pending memory to be V-stocked is "3R jackpot". suggesting.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to attract attention not only to the dialogue sound but also to the effect sound among the production sounds, thereby improving the interest of the first V-stock production.

(Effect 5)
As shown in FIG. 9-31, a CU effect (first movable body effect) in which the movable body YM moves from the initial position to the second motion position can be executed in the first half of the battle SP in the battle SP effect. When the effect is executed, the visibility of the effect image related to the battle SP displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is lowered. At this time, the effect sound B is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R without being scratched.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-34 to 9-37, in the latter half of the battle SP in the battle SP production, the movable body YM moves from the initial position to the second operating position in a second normal jackpot notification production (second 2 movable body effect) can be executed, and when the second normal jackpot notification effect is executed, the visibility of the effect image related to the battle SP displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is reduced. It's becoming At this time, the effect sound C2 is scratched and reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R.

According to such a configuration, an image is displayed by performing a common action of the movable body in the CU performance suggesting the degree of expectation of the big win and the second normal jackpot informing performance informing whether or not the big win has occurred. An effect that reduces the visibility of the device 5 can be executed. However, by scratching the effect sound only for the second normal jackpot notification effect, while clarifying the difference between the CU effect and the second normal jackpot notification effect, the production cost of the effect and effect control (movable body control) ) can be reduced.

(Effect 5-1)
As shown in FIG. 9-8, "CH08": The effect sound B reproduced and output in the CU effect does not include dialogue sound and is composed only of sound effects ([sound effect B]), and "CH11 ” and “CH12”: The effect sound C2 reproduced and output in the second normal jackpot notification effect is the dialogue sound ([first dialogue sound C2] “Vi” (impact: strong) and [second dialogue sound C2] “ , and a sound effect ([first sound effect C]).

According to such a configuration, when notifying that the display result is a ``big hit'', a scratch-processed effect sound different from the normal effect sound is reproduced and output, thereby providing a special feeling at the time of the big win notification. can be improved. Further, by repeatedly reproducing and outputting [first dialogue sound C2] ``vi'' (impact: strong) at the beginning of the effect sound C2, the impact of the sound at the beginning of the effect sound is strengthened, and the player wins a big hit. The effect sound when is notified can impress, and listening to the effect sound becomes a game motivation for the player, so that the operation can be promoted.

(Effect 5-2)
As shown in FIGS. 9-34 to 9-38, when the second normal jackpot notification effect is executed, the first [first effect sound C2] “V” and the second [first effect The playback output interval of the sound C2] ``vi'' is 0.5S (first blackout period), and the second [first effect C2] ``vi'' and the third [first effect C2] The playback output interval of "vi" is 0.4S (second blackout period), and the third [first effect C2] "vi" and the fourth [first effect C2] "vi" is 0.3S (the third blackout period), and the fourth [first sound effect C2] "vi" and [first sound effect C2] and [second sound effect C2] " The playback output interval of "Victory" is 0.2S (fourth blackout period).

In this way, the effect sound C2 is reproduced and output after being scratched a plurality of times (four times) in succession while the [first effect sound C2] "vi" is gradually shortened at scratch intervals. [First sound effect C2] and [Second sound effect C2] “Victory” are reproduced and output after a mute period of .

According to such a configuration, when the second normal-time big win notification performance is executed, the performance sound C2 subjected to the scratch processing is reproduced and output, thereby improving the special feeling of the second normal-time big win notification performance. Further, since the effect sound C2 is scratched, the effect sound when the second normal jackpot notification effect is executed can impress the player.

In addition, when the scratch processing of the sound effect C2 is executed, the scratch interval is gradually shortened, so that the last part of the sound effect C2 [first sound effect C2] and [second sound effect C2] " Victory” can be set as the peak of the excitement immediately before the reproduction output. Then, after a moment (0.2 s mute period) after this peak of the excitement, the last part of the sound effect C2 [first sound effect C2] and [second sound effect C2] "Victory" is reproduced and output, it is possible to reproduce and output the effect sound that leaves a more impressive impression.

(Effect 5-3)
As shown in FIG. 9-31, the operation prompting display is not displayed on the image display device 5 before the CU effect is executed, and the player is not allowed to operate the operation unit. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9-34 to 9-38, before the second normal jackpot notification effect is executed, an operation prompting display is displayed on the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate. I'm doing the operation of the department.

According to such a configuration, when the player operates the operation unit, the second normal jackpot notification effect is executed and the movable body is operated, so that the player feels as if he has grabbed the jackpot with his own hand. It can be made to feel like it, and interest can be improved.

(Effect 6)
As shown in FIG. 9-76, the normal time jackpot notification effect (first normal time jackpot notification effect, second normal time jackpot notification effect, third normal time jackpot notification effect) executed in normal time (normal state) , the effect sounds (effect sound C1, effect sound C2, effect sound C3, hereinafter referred to as “normal jackpot notification sound” as appropriate) are reproduced and output after being scratched. On the other hand, in the right-hand hit big hit notification effect (first right hit big win notification effect, second right hit big win notification effect, third right hit big hit notification effect) executed in the right hit (rush mode), Effect sounds (effect sound D1, effect sound D2, effect sound D3, hereinafter referred to as "right-hand hit big hit notification sound") are reproduced and output without being scratched.

In addition, the reproduction output period of the right-handed jackpot notification sound is 5.25 seconds, and the reproduction output period of the normal jackpot notification sound is 6.25 seconds. However, the reproduction output period is shorter than that of the normal jackpot notification sound.

According to such a configuration, in the normal-time jackpot notification effect for notifying that the display result will be a "jackpot" (first hit) in the normal time, the scratch-processed effect sound (normal-time jackpot notification sound) is reproduced and output. By doing so, the impact at the time of the first hit can be enhanced. In addition, in the right-hand hitting jackpot notification effect that indicates that the display result will be a "big hit" when hitting right (rush mode), the scratch processing is not performed, and the playback output period is shorter than the normal jackpot notification sound. By reproducing and outputting the sound (right-hand hitting big hit notification sound), it is possible to prevent the feeling of speed and exhilaration during right-hand hitting from deteriorating.

(Effect 6-1)
As shown in FIG. 9-76, the reproduction output period of the right-handed jackpot notification sound is shorter than that of the normal jackpot notification sound. That is, the right-hand hitting big hit notification effect has a shorter effect execution period than the normal big win notification effect.

According to such a configuration, by shortening the performance execution period of the right-hand hitting big win notification performance executed during the right hitting, the big win interval is longer than when the big win reporting performance having a long performance execution period is executed. It is possible to make the game much shorter, to give continuity to the big wins, and to provide the players with vigorous games.

(Effect 6-2)
As shown in FIG. 9-8, as normal jackpot notification sounds, the effect sound C1 of "CH09" and "CH10", the effect sound C2 of "CH11" and "CH12", and "CH13" and "CH14" , and the right-handed jackpot notification sounds include the sound effects D1 of "CH15" and "CH16", the sound effects D2 of "CH17" and "CH18", and the sound effects "CH19" and " CH20” effect sound D3 is provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-9, the effect sound K of "CH40" is provided as the effect sound of the sudden big hit notification effect (premier effect).

According to such a configuration, by providing the jackpot notification sound different from the jackpot notification sound at normal time and the jackpot notification sound at right-handed hitting, it is possible to draw attention to the period other than the super reach in the variable display, and the interest is increased. can improve.

(Effect 7)
As shown in FIG. 9-16, the final display mode of the active display is the blue mode, and regardless of the change pattern, the normal change effect is executed at a rate of 100%, and the special change effect is executed. is not running. Further, when the final display mode of the active display is the red mode and the change pattern is one of the change patterns 101, 201, 301, and 401, the normal change effect is performed at a rate of 30%, and the normal change effect is performed at a rate of 70%. A special change effect is executed at a rate. Further, when the final display mode of the active display is the gold mode and the change pattern is one of the change patterns 101, 201, 301, and 401, the normal change effect is performed at a rate of 10%, and the normal change effect is performed at a rate of 90%. A special change effect is executed at a rate.

That is, when the normal change effect is executed, there is a possibility that the final display mode of the active display will change to a blue mode with a low expectation of big win, but when the special change effect is executed, the final display mode of the active display will change. There is no possibility of changing to a blue mode with a low chance of winning a big hit, and it changes to either a red mode with a high chance of winning a big win or a gold mode.

As shown in FIGS. 9-17, before the normal change effect is executed, no effect is executed, and the scratch-processed effect sounds are not reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9-19 to 9-22, before the special change effect is executed, the change precursor effect: success pattern is executed, and the effect sound EA scratched from the speakers 8L and 8R. "Ready, Go, Go, Go, Go, Go" is reproduced and output.

According to such a configuration, by reproducing and outputting the effect sound EA, it is possible to suggest that the special change effect with a higher expectation for a big hit than the normal change effect will be executed, so that the effect sound EA is reproduced to the player. It is possible to make the user pay attention to whether or not the image is output, thereby enhancing interest.

(Effect 7-1)
As shown in FIG. 9-18, it is possible to execute a change precursor effect with a success pattern and a failure pattern, and as shown in FIGS. A special change effect is executed when the success pattern change portent effect in which the effect sound EA "ready, go, go, go, go, go" is reproduced and outputted.

According to such a configuration, execution of the change precursor performance can suggest execution of the special change performance with a higher expectation for a big hit than the normal change performance, so that the performance sound EA is reproduced and output to the player. It is possible to make the user pay attention to whether or not it will be performed, thereby improving interest.

(Effect 7-2)
As shown in FIG. 9-18 (3A), when the change portent effect: success pattern is executed, the second effect sound EA is reproduced four times and the third effect sound EA is reproduced once. The characters "GO" are superimposed on the active enlarged display EAC five times in total at the center of the screen of the image display device 5. FIG.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to appeal to the player's sight and hearing the feeling of exhilaration when the player recognizes that the change precursor effect is a success pattern and that the special change effect will be executed after this.

(Effect 7-3)
As shown in FIG. 9-18, when the change precursor effect: success pattern is executed, the characters "READY" and the characters "GO" are displayed, suggesting that the special change effect will start. ing.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve expectations for execution of the special change effect before the start of the special change effect, and to improve interest in the change effect of changing the display mode of the active display.

(Effect 7-4)
As shown in FIG. 9-18, when the change precursor effect: success pattern is executed, the characters "GO" suggesting that the special change effect will start are displayed, while the change precursor effect: When the failure pattern is executed, the characters "GO" suggesting the start of the special change performance are not displayed, and the crack image CI suggesting that the special change performance is not started is displayed.

According to such a configuration, by displaying the characters "GO", it is possible to improve the expectation for the execution of the special change performance before the start of the special change performance, and to enhance the interest of the change performance. can improve. In addition, by displaying the crack image without displaying the characters "GO", it is possible to reliably notify that the special change performance will not be executed, thereby preventing the player from having excessive expectations.

(Effect 7-5)
As shown in FIG. 9-23, the R suspension effect for informing that the change premonition effect will be executed in the variable display that is the determination target at the time of starting winning is displayed by displaying the display mode of the suspension display in the R mode. is executed as a pre-reading notice effect.

According to such a configuration, the variable display is executed by executing the R suspension effect as the foreseeing forewarning effect before the variable display for executing the change precursor effect and the special change effect is executed. It is possible to make the user pay attention to the variable display from before the display.

(Effect 7-6)
As shown in FIGS. 9-19 to 9-22, when the special change effect is executed, active candidate displays (for example, blue mode, red mode, gold mode) is displayed, and a "NEXT" icon is displayed beyond the central route portion of the route display to notify that the player will proceed to the next step.

According to such a configuration, by displaying two active candidate displays, the player advances to the active candidate display with a higher expectation of a big win, and the display mode of the active display changes to that display mode. You can play with the expectation that it will be done. In addition, by displaying the "NEXT" icon, the player continues the special change effect and advances to the next stage, and expects that the active candidate display with a higher degree of expectation for a big hit will be displayed. can.

In the special change effect, unlike the normal change effect, before the active display changes, an active candidate display that shows the active display after the change is presented, so it improves the interest in the stage before the active display actually changes. can. In addition, since the active display actually changes and the special change effect continues and progresses to the next stage can be expected, the interest can be improved more than the normal change effect.

(Effect 8)
As shown in FIGS. 9-65 to 9-67, when the time-saving rush effect is executed, a third countdown image CDI3, a second countdown image CDI2, and a A first countdown image CDI<b>1 and a start image JSI are displayed on the image display device 5 .

In addition, corresponding to the display of these effect images, the first effect sound F3 "three", the first effect sound F2 "two", the first effect sound F1 "one", the second effect sound F (scratch: four times ), and the second effect sound F and the third effect sound F “s, s, s, s, start” are reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In particular, the character "START" of the start image, the second sound effect F (scratch: 4 times), and the second sound effect F and the third sound effect F "s, s, s, s, start" Related.

According to such a configuration, the player can be appropriately informed of the control timing of the time saving state by reproducing and outputting the scratched effect sound when the time saving state is controlled. can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(Effect 8-1)
As shown in FIGS. 9-65 to 9-67, when controlled to the time saving state (rush mode), "S", "T", which suggests that it is controlled to the time saving state (rush mode), Start image JSI with 'A', 'R', 'T': countdown image with the letters 'START' and '3', '2', '1' to suggest that the start image JSI will be displayed (First countdown image CDI1 to third countdown image CDI3): A time-saving rush effect is being executed to display the number “321”.

When the start image is displayed, the second effect sound F "S" corresponding to "S" of "START" is scratched four times in succession and reproduced. The corresponding third effect sound F "tart" is reproduced and output without being scratched.

According to such a configuration, as a method of notifying a right-handed hit, a constantly right-handed promotion image containing the characters "right-handed" and an arrow image instructing right-handed hitting to enter the second start winning slot is displayed. By providing not only a method of displaying on the image display device 5 but also a method of reproducing and outputting the effect sound F scratched from the speakers 8L and 8R, the player is prevented from falling into a disadvantageous situation in the right-handed game. can.

(Effect 8-2)
As shown in FIGS. 9-65 to 9-66 (5), when the time-saving rush effect is executed in the jackpot game state, the third countdown image CDI3 moves from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 toward the right side of the screen. The start image JSI is displayed while moving from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 toward the right side of the screen. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-66 (6) to 9-67 (8), when the time saving state is controlled, the character (A) CA moves from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 toward the right side of the screen. displayed while moving. That is, the third countdown image CDI3, the start image JSI, and the character (A) CA are moving in the same direction (rightward).

According to such a configuration, by associating the moving direction of the character information with the moving direction of the character, the effect on the image display device 5 when the game state is changed can be shown seamlessly, and the effect can be improved. Discomfort can be prevented.

(Effect 8-3)
As shown in FIG. 9-66(5), the start image JSI is an image that includes the characters "START" and a rightward arrow object. This right-pointing arrow object suggests that a right-handed game is to be started.

According to such a configuration, a game method in a time-saving state (by turning the ball hitting operation handle 30 to the right) in a jackpot game state in which a time-saving rush effect is executed by displaying a rightward arrow object. can be suggested, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

(Effect 8-4)
As shown in FIG. 9-65(1), when the time saving effect is executed, the image display device 5 displays the rush mode explanation image JRI. Rush mode explanation image is information explaining how to play rush mode ("Keep hitting right until powerful RUSH is 0 times remaining!") The image includes a character A and a demonstration icon (an icon showing the characters “DEMO”) that suggests to the player that there is no need to operate the steering wheel 30 .

According to such a configuration, the player can be made to recognize the technique of the right-handed game before the right-handed game in the time saving state is started, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

(Effect 8-5)
As shown in FIG. 9-78, the time saving rush effect is executed during the jackpot ED period of the jackpot game state.

According to such a configuration, before being controlled to the time saving state, along with the explanation of the right-handed game, the start of the right-handed game to be performed from now on can be excited, and the interest of the right-handed game can be improved.

(Effect 9-1)
As shown in FIGS. 9-28 to 9-30, in the story SP development rendering, a character A whose display color is yellow and a purple character A whose display color is in a complementary color contrast relationship with yellow are alternately displayed. When displayed twice, the first effect sound G "pa" is scratched four times to reproduce and output "pa, pa, pa, pa (, powerful)".

According to such a configuration, by associating the effect image (video) displayed on the image display device 5 with the effect sound reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a sense of unity between the video and the sound can be obtained. can be enhanced to realize an effect that appeals to the player's sight and hearing.

(Effect 9-2)
As shown in FIG. 9-28, when the story SP development effect is executed, before the first effect sound G "pa" is scratched and reproduced, the effect sound G is muted and reproduced. It is

According to such a configuration, after the muted effect sound G, the scratch-processed first effect sound G "pa" is reproduced and output, so that the player can be impressed with the story SP development effect. .

(Effect 9-3)
As shown in FIGS. 9-28 to 9-30, in the story SP development rendering, character A whose display color is yellow and character A whose purple color is in a complementary color contrast relationship with yellow on the color wheel are alternately displayed. It is displayed twice.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the saturation of the display color of the alternately displayed characters A and to make them appear more vivid, thereby enhancing the interest of the story SP development presentation.

(Effect 9-4)
As described above, in the story SP development effect, when the character A whose display color is reversed in lightness and gradation is alternately displayed twice each, the scratch-processed effect sound G "pa, pa, Pa, Pa, Powerful" may be reproduced and output.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the saturation of the display color of the alternately displayed characters A and to make them appear more vivid, thereby enhancing the interest of the story SP development presentation.

(Effect 9-5)
As described above, in the story SP development effect, three types of characters A, yellow character A, red character A, and blue character A, may be displayed in order.

According to such a configuration, the saturation of the display color of the character A can be made stronger than when the two-color character A is alternately displayed, and the display color of the character A can be displayed more vividly. It is possible to improve the interest of development production.

(Effect 9-6)
As described above, in the story SP development effect, when two types of characters A, a yellow character A and a purple character A, are alternately displayed, the display size of the yellow character A is small and the display size of the purple character A is small. The display size of A may be large.

According to such a configuration, the impression of the character A can be stronger than when the character A of the same display size is alternately displayed with only the display color changed, and the interest of the story SP development production can be enhanced. We can improve further.

(Effect 9-7)
As shown in FIGS. 9-28 to 9-30, in the story SP development effect, when the character A is alternately displayed in complementary colors, the The display colors of the small patterns in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r and the active display AC of the normal mode in the active display area ACE are not inverted to complementary colors.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by not changing the display color of the information for checking the progress of the game.

(Effect 10)
As shown in FIGS. 9-32 and 9-33, when the first normal jackpot notification effect is being executed as the jackpot notification effect during the challenge SP, the effect sound scratched from the speakers 8L and 8R. C1 is reproduced and output.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-34 to 9-37, when the second normal jackpot notification effect is being executed as the jackpot notification effect during the battle SP, the scratch processing is performed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The effect sound C2 is reproduced and output.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-8, "CH09": [first effect sound C1] to be scratched out of the effect sound C1 is the first dialogue sound C1 "ko" and the first sound effect C "CH11": [first effect sound C2] to be scratched of the effect sound C2 is composed of the first dialogue sound C2 "vi" and the first sound effect C, The sound effects of [first sound effect C1] and [first sound effect C2] are common to sound effect C.

According to such a configuration, a plurality of types of big win notification effects are provided as the big win notification effects for informing that the display result will be a "big win", thereby making it more interesting than the case where only one type of big win notification effect is executed. can be improved. In addition, in a plurality of types of jackpot notification effects, by individually setting only dialogue sounds and using common sound effects, it is possible to reduce the production cost of the effects and the storage capacity related to the effects while trying to differentiate the jackpot notification effects. .

(Effect 10-1)
As shown in FIGS. 9-32 and 9-33, the first normal jackpot notification effect is executed as the jackpot notification effect in the variation pattern involving the super reach of the challenge SP. Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-34 to 9-37, the second normal jackpot notification effect is executed as the jackpot notification effect in the variation pattern with the super reach of the battle SP.

According to such a configuration, since the jackpot notification effect differs for each type of super reach, the execution of the jackpot notification effect in a specific super reach motivates the player to play the game.

(Effect 10-2)
In the present embodiment, in the effect sound C1 scratched in the first normal jackpot notification effect, the sound effects (first sound effect C, second sound effect C) are the dialogue sounds (first dialogue sound C1, second sound effect C). It is assumed that the reproduction output period is longer than that of the two-speech sound C1). The same applies to the effect sound C2 scratched in the second normal jackpot notification effect and the effect sound C3 scratched in the third normal jackpot notification effect.

According to such a configuration, in the scratch-processed effect sound that is reproduced and output in the normal jackpot notification effect, the effect sound has a longer reproduction output period than the dialogue sound, so that the display result is usually "big hit". You can enjoy the aftertaste of the joy of having become ", and you can improve the interest of the big hit notification production.

(Effect 10-3)
As shown in FIGS. 9-32 and 9-33, when the operation prompting display BT before execution of the jackpot notification effect during the challenge SP is displayed, the effect sound I2 "Press" from the speakers 8L and 8R. (Character B voice) is reproduced and output. The character B has in common the character that mainly appears in the challenge SP and the character voice of the production sound when the operation prompting display BT is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-34 to 9-37, when the operation prompting display BT before execution of the jackpot notification effect during the battle SP is displayed, the effect sound I1 " from the speakers 8L and 8R Press" (Chara A voice) is reproduced and output. The character A has in common the character that mainly appears in the battle SP and the character voice of the production sound when the operation prompting display BT is displayed.

According to such a configuration, the super ready-to-win effect can be differentiated by providing a unique effect sound when the operation prompting display is displayed and a unique jackpot notification sound for each super ready-to-win effect. . Also, a player who likes a specific character can play a game expecting that character to appear in video or audio.

(Effect 10-4)
As shown in FIG. 9-69, in the annihilation SP effect, the effect sound H is newly reproduced and output each time the operation of the operation unit by the player is received, so that the player can simulate scratching at any timing. The produced sound H is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to reproduce and output the scratch-processed effect sound by operating the operation unit, which leads to promotion of operation of the operation unit, and annihilation having a game property of repeatedly hitting the operation unit. It is possible to improve the interest of the SP production.

(Effect 11)
As shown in FIGS. 9-42 to 9-44, when the resurrection effect is executed, the scratch-processed effect sound J ``Fi, Fi, Fi, Fi, Fever'' is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is At this time, the first restoration display “FE” and the second restoration display “FE” enlarged more than the first restoration display are alternately displayed on the image display device 5 .

According to such a configuration, in the resurrection effect, the first resurrection display "FE" and the second resurrection display "FE" related to the first effect sound J "Fi" reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed as images. By being displayed on the device 5, an effect that appeals to the player's sight and hearing can be realized. In addition, by switching the display size of the characters ``FE'' corresponding to the reproduction output timing of the first production sound J ``Fi'', the sense of unity between video and audio can be strengthened, and the interest in the revival production can be improved. .

(Effect 11-1)
As shown in FIGS. 9-42 to 9-44, character A is included inside the first resurrection display and the second resurrection display.

According to such a configuration, it is difficult to display a character (because the display area cannot be secured) with normal character information (dialogue display displayed in a conversation preview effect in which characters talk with each other). Character information (first resurrection display, second resurrection display) when a performance informing a big win such as a resurrection performance is executed can display a character, thereby improving the special feeling of the resurrection performance.

(Effect 11-2)
As shown in FIGS. 9-42 to 9-44, the first resurrection display and the second resurrection display are composed of the characters "FE" which are the first two characters of "FEVER" indicating "big hit". It is

According to such a configuration, it becomes clear that a big win will occur after the resurrection effect, and an appropriate game can be realized without confusing the player.

(Effect 11-3)
As shown in FIGS. 9-42 to 9-44, the first resurrection display and the second resurrection display are "FE" related to [first sound effect J] "phi" scratched from sound effect J. consists of the characters

According to such a configuration, the sense of unity between video and audio can be enhanced, and the interest in the resurrection effect can be improved.

(Effect 11-4)
As shown in FIGS. 9-42 to 9-44, when the resurrection effect is executed, the first resurrection display is composed of white display color, and the second resurrection display is composed of white and complementary colors. It is composed of a certain black display color, and the restoration display of these display colors is alternately displayed twice each.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the saturation of the display color of the resurrection display that is alternately displayed, so that the resurrection display can be displayed more vividly, thereby enhancing the interest of the resurrection presentation.

(Effect 11-5)
As described above, in the resurrection effect, the first resurrection display, the second resurrection display having a larger display size than the first resurrection display, the third resurrection display having a larger display size than the second resurrection display, and the second resurrection display having a larger display size than the second resurrection display. A fourth resurrection display having a display size larger than that of the third resurrection display may be displayed in order.

According to such a configuration, in the resurrection effect, the resurrection display can be used to inform the player of the fact that the game will be a big hit while gradually increasing excitement, thereby improving the interest of the resurrection effect.

This specification may or may not adopt a configuration in which each embodiment of the present disclosure is combined.

[Other Modifications]
(1) In addition, in the above-described embodiment, in the jackpot game or the time-saving game when the V stock effect is not executed, an example is shown in which the player can select a song to be reproduced and output from a plurality of types of songs. Different music may be reproduced in a predetermined order each time a jackpot game or a time-saving game is executed, or music may be reproduced at random. In this case, these songs do not include the song X, which is the dedicated song when the V stock effect is executed.

(2) In the above-described embodiment, the player cannot select a song other than the song X in the jackpot game or the time-saving game when the V stock effect is executed. Regardless of the form, the player may be able to select a song other than the song X in the jackpot game or time-saving game when the V stock effect is executed.

For example, in a jackpot game or a time-saving game when the V-stock effect is executed, although the player can select a song other than the song X, the output sound volume of the selectable song may be lowered, and the special operation promotion display BT2 is performed. (In this example, the icon imitating a cross key) may be less visible.

(3) In the above-described embodiment, some elements (rainbow telop display TI, V stock number display VNI, music X) in the holding consecutive production are the first holding consecutive production and the second holding consecutive production. Although a common example has been shown, it is not limited to such a form, and all elements in the holding continuous effect may be common between the first holding continuous effect and the second holding continuous effect.

In addition, in the holding continuous effect, some elements (rainbow telop display TI, V stock number display VNI) executed using the image display device 5 are common to the first holding continuous effect and the second holding continuous effect. , and some elements (music X) performed using the speakers 8L and 8R are common to the first holding continuous effect and the second holding continuous effect. Not limited to this, in the holding continuous effect, some elements executed using the first effect device (for example, the image display device 5) are common to the first holding continuous effect and the second holding continuous effect, Part of the elements executed using the second effect device (for example, the speakers 8L and 8R) may not be common between the first hold-continue effect and the second hold-continue effect.

(4) In the above-described embodiment, an example of using "ROUND" as the unit of round display is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and units other than "ROUND" may be used as the unit of round display. good.

For example, the unit of the round display may be a unit such as "round" related to the jackpot round, or may be a unit such as "dream" or "powerful" which is not related to the jackpot round.

(5) In addition, in the above-described embodiment, an example of notifying the V stock number (retained number of stations) in the V stock effect was shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and in the V stock effect, the V stock number ( number of pending stations) may not be notified.

For example, in the V stock effect, if the number of V stocks (retained number of runs) is not reported, the player cannot recognize how many "wins" will occur in the retained memory even though the V stock effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the unknown V-stock number while giving the player a sense of security due to the execution of the V-stock effect, thereby improving the interest in the effect after the V-stock effect.

(6) In the above-described embodiment, an example was shown in which the number of V-stocks (the number of pending stations) is notified by operating the operation unit once in the V-stock effect, but the present invention is not limited to such a form. , in the V stock presentation, the number of V stocks (the number of pending runs) may be notified by other methods.

For example, it is possible to execute a V stock number notification effect to notify the V stock number. may be reported.

(7) In the above embodiment, the V stock number display in the V stock effect indicates the number of V stocks. may suggest factors other than the number of V-stocks.

For example, the V stock number display in the V stock effect can be displayed with effect display around the V stock number display. Depending on the display color of the effect display, the type of "hit" to be the target of the V stock may be suggested. If the effect display of the V stock number display is rainbow color, it is suggested that it is "10R jackpot A", and if the effect display of the V stock number display is red, "10R jackpot A" or "10R jackpot B". , and when the effect display of the V stock number display is blue, it is suggested that it is "3R big win B", "10R big win A" or "10R big win B".

(8) In the above-described embodiment, the scratch processing is executed by continuously reproducing and outputting the first audio data out of the first audio data and the second audio data forming the audio. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and audio data in which scratch-processed audio content is recorded is stored in advance in a storage area for reproducing audio data, and this audio data is reproduced and output. You may let

For example, as [song data X] of a song X, one song data in which the beginning of the song is scratched as "We, we, we, we, welcome lucky (hereinafter omitted)" is stored in advance, and this song data is stored. It may be reproduced and output.

(9) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the special operation prompting display BT2 is not displayed on the image display device 5 while the first V stock effect is being executed. While the first V stock effect is being executed, the image display device 5 may not display any effect image different from the special operation prompting display BT2.

For example, when the light amount display for adjusting the light amount of the screen and the volume display for adjusting the volume value can be displayed in a predetermined area of the image display device 5, when the first V stock effect is not being executed. Secondly, the image display device 5 is caused to display the light amount display and the volume display, while the image display device 5 is not caused to display the light amount display and the volume display when the first V stock effect is being executed.

(10) In the above embodiment, when the V stock effect is not being executed during the jackpot game or the time saving game, the music can be selected from the music A, the music B, and the music C in any situation. , but it is not limited to such a form, and selectable songs may be changed according to the situation when the V stock effect is not being executed during the big win game or the time saving game.

For example, the number of songs that can be selected may increase by one each time the number of consecutive jackpots increases by one. Also, when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches 10, the songs may be released so that all the songs can be selected.

(11) In the above embodiment, when the first V stock effect is executed during the jackpot RD period, the first V stock effect is started in the second round ("3ROUND" in the round display) of the jackpot round game. , but when the first V stock effect is executed during the jackpot RD period, the first V stock effect may be started at a timing other than the second round of the jackpot round game.

For example, when the first V stock performance is executed during the jackpot RD period, it is decided in advance by a lottery which of the 1st to 10th rounds in the jackpot round game the first V stock performance is to be started. A first V stock effect may be started in a round depending on the result.

(12) In the above embodiment, when the first V stock effect is executed, the image display device 5 shows an example in which text information related to the effect sound reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and when the first V stock effect is executed, information other than character information related to the effect sounds reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R may be displayed on the image display device 5. good too.

For example, when the first V stock effect is executed, the character A may be displayed as information related to the effect sounds reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R on the image display device 5. FIG.

(13) In addition, in the above-described embodiment, in the jackpot game or the time-saving game after the first V-stock effect is executed, an example is shown in which selection/change of music is restricted. However, it may be possible to select/change music in the jackpot game or the time-saving game after the first V stock effect is executed.

For example, in the jackpot game or the time-saving game after the first V stock effect is executed, music may be selected/changed from music A, music B, music C, and music X.

(14) In the above embodiment, when the first V stock effect is executed, the channel setting ratio of the effect sound A reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R is set to 100%. , 8R is set to 20%, but the configuration is not limited to this.

For example, when the first V stock effect is executed, the channel setting ratio of the effect sound A reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R is set to 100%, while the music piece X reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R is set to 100%. may be set to 0% (mute processing).

(15) In the above embodiment, according to the type of the effect sound of the effect sound A, the jackpot type of the reserved memory to be V-stocked is suggested. The type of sound effect here may be [sound effect A1] and [sound effect A2] with different reproduction output periods (for example, [sound effect A1]: 3S, [sound effect A2]: 1S ), and [sound effect A1] and [sound effect A2] may be different in reproduction output content (for example, [sound effect A1]: "(pickin)", [sound effect A2]: "(cuin)") .

(16) In the above embodiment, the effect sound B that is reproduced and output in the CU effect is an example in which it does not include dialogue sounds and is composed only of sound effects. , the dramatic sound B may include dialogue sounds.

For example, the effect sound B may consist of [speech sound B] and [sound effect B]. However, when the CU effect is executed, the effect sound B is reproduced and output without being scratched.

(17) In the above-described embodiment, the effect sound C2 reproduced and output in the second normal jackpot notification effect is composed of dialogue sound and effect sound. However, the effect sound C2 may have a structure other than a dialog sound and an effect sound.

For example, the effect sound C2 may include BGM in addition to dialogue sounds and sound effects. In this case, the effect sound C2 may include at least one of dialogue sound, sound effect, and BGM, or none of dialogue sound, sound effect, and BGM.

(18) In the above embodiment, when the sound effect C2 is reproduced, after the [first sound effect C2] "Vi" is scratched and reproduced four times in a row, the [first 1 effect sound C2] and [second effect sound C2] “Victory” have been shown as an example, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and when the effect sound C2 is reproduced and output, [first effect After the sound C2] "Vi" is scratch-processed and reproduced four times in a row, the [second effect sound C2] "kutori" may be reproduced. In this case, when the second normal jackpot notification effect is executed, "Vi, Vi, Vi, Vi, Kutori" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

(19) In the above embodiment, the effect sound I1 when the operation prompting display BT is displayed before the execution of the second normal jackpot notification effect is not scratched. The effect sound I1 when the operation prompting display BT is displayed before the second normal jackpot notification effect is executed may be scratched.

(20) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the right-handed hit notification sound is composed of a dialogue sound and a sound effect is shown. However, it does not have to be composed of dialogue sounds and sound effects. For example, the right-handed jackpot notification sound may consist of only a dialogue sound, or may consist of only an effect sound.

(21) In the above embodiment, at the timing of the winning branch during the super ready-to-win production, as the jackpot notification sound, a normal jackpot notification sound and a right-handed jackpot notification sound are provided, and at the start of fluctuation or when the reach is established. Although an example in which a sudden big-hit notification sound is provided as the big-hit notification sound has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and a big-hit notification sound different from the above-described big-hit notification sound may be provided.

For example, after the timing at which the normal jackpot notification sound or the right-hand jackpot notification sound is reproduced and output to notify that the display result is a "jackpot", the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R At the timing when the decorative pattern with the display result of "big win" is stopped and displayed, a pattern big win notification effect sound for notifying that the display result is "big win" may be provided by using the decorative pattern again.

(22) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which a scratch-processed effect sound is reproduced is output in the change sign effect that indicates whether or not a special change effect in which the display mode of the active display changes is to be executed. Although shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the scratch-processed effect sound may be reproduced and output in the change portent effect indicating whether or not the effect in which the information different from the active display is to be executed is to be executed. .

For example, it is possible to execute a background change effect in which a background image, which is information related to variable display, changes. In the background change rendering, the background image is changed from the normal background image to the first background image or the second background image. The degree of expectation for a big hit is set in the relationship of normal background image<first background image<second background image. In the change precursor effect indicating whether or not the background change effect is to be executed, the scratch-processed effect sound may be reproduced and output.

(23) In the above-described embodiment, the characters "READY" suggesting that the special change effect will start and the characters "GO" are displayed when the change precursor effect: success pattern is executed. However, it is not limited to such a form, and information different from the characters "READY" and the characters "GO" may be displayed when the change precursor effect: success pattern is executed. .

For example, when the change presage effect: success pattern is executed, the characters "yes" suggesting that the special change effect will start and the characters "don!" may be displayed.

(24) In addition, in the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which a time-saving rush effect is executed to notify that the time-saving state (rush mode) is controlled. A rush effect for notifying that the control is to be executed may be executed.

For example, a big-hit entry effect for reporting control to the big-hit game state may be executed, or a small-hit entry performance for reporting control to the small-hit game state may be executed.

For example, when a big-hit rush performance is executed, a big-hit explanatory image is displayed on the image display device 5 . The jackpot explanation image includes information explaining the game method during the jackpot ("Keep hitting right until the final round of the bonus is over!") It is an image including a character A and a demonstration icon suggesting to the player that there is no need to operate 30 . At this time, the effect sound F is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the image display device 5 displays the third countdown image CDI3. At this time, the effect sound F [first effect sound F3] "three" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the image display device 5 displays the second countdown image CDI2. At this time, the effect sound F [first effect sound F2] "two" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the image display device 5 displays the first countdown image CDI1. At this time, the effect sound F [first effect sound F1] "one" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the start image JSI is displayed on the image display device 5 . At this time, the sound effect F [second sound effect F (scratch: 4 times)] and [second sound effect F and third sound effect F] “s, s, s, s, start” are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Playback output.

Also, in the slot machine, a rushing effect may be executed to notify that the bonus (big bonus, regular bonus, pseudo bonus, etc.), RT, AT, ART, CZ, etc. will be controlled. In these rush effects, scratched effect sounds may be reproduced and output.

(25) In the above-described embodiment, in the time-saving rush effect, the characters “START” on the image display device 5 and the [second effect sound F] and [third effect sound F] scratched from the speakers 8L and 8R Sound F] Although an example in which the production sound of “start” matches is shown, this is not limited to such a form, and in the time-saving rush production, the characters “START” of the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L, 8R It does not have to be the same as the directing sound from.

For example, in the time-saving effect, when the characters "START" are displayed on the image display device 5, the effect sounds "Let's go", "Go", and "Hassha" are reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. may be Then, these effect sounds may be scratched and reproduced.

(26) In the above embodiment, the start image is an image including an object with a right-pointing arrow. It may be an image containing For example, the start image may be an image including effect displays or characters. When an effect display is included in the start image, the effect display may be in a gold mode in order to excite the start of the right-handed game. Moreover, when the character is included in the start image, the character may point to the right direction to suggest that the right-handed game is about to start.

(27) In addition, in the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the time-saving rush effect is executed during the jackpot ED period of the jackpot game state. It may be executed at a timing other than the period. For example, the time-saving rush effect may be executed during the jackpot RD period of the jackpot game state, and the time-saving rush effect is executed in the final round of the big win round game. In this case, an effect of selecting the effect mode in the rush mode may be executed in the round immediately before the final round of the big hit round game.

(28) In addition, in the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the time-saving rush effect is always executed during the jackpot ED period in the jackpot game state. It does not necessarily have to be executed during the ED period.

For example, in the time-saving performance, an operation prompting display for selecting whether or not to execute the time-saving rushing performance is displayed during the jackpot ED period of the jackpot game state, and when this operation prompting display is operated, the time-saving rushing is performed. A rendition may be performed.

(29) In addition, in the above embodiment, in the scratch-processed effect sound that is reproduced and output in the normal jackpot notification effect, the effect sound has a longer reproduction output period than the dialogue sound. Without being limited to such a form, in the scratch-processed effect sound reproduced and output in the normal jackpot notification effect, the reproduction output period of the dialogue sound may be longer than that of the effect sound.

(30) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the character that mainly appears in the super ready-to-win effect and the character voice character of the effect sound when the operation prompting display is displayed are the same. It is not limited to such a form, and the character that mainly appears in the super ready-to-win effect and the character of the character voice of the effect sound when the operation prompting display is displayed may not match. For example, if the character that mainly appears in the super ready-to-win production does not match the character of the character voice of the production sound when the operation prompting display is displayed, even if a configuration in which the big hit is confirmed is adopted as a contradictory production. good.

(31) In the above-described embodiment, the player continuously hits the operating unit to cause the pseudo scratch processing to be performed at an arbitrary timing to reproduce and output the effect sound. Regardless of the form, the player may operate the operation unit with an operation method different from the continuous hitting, thereby performing a pseudo scratch process at an arbitrary timing and reproducing and outputting the effect sound. For example, by long-pressing the operation unit, the effect sound may be simulated to be scratched to be reproduced and output.

(32) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the character A is displayed inside the resurrection display (first resurrection display, second resurrection display) in the resurrection effect. An image different from the character A may be displayed inside the resurrection display in the resurrection effect.

For example, a character different from the character A may be displayed inside the resurrection display in the resurrection effect. In this case, premium characters unique to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and characters that have mainly appeared in the Super Reach are displayed.

(33) In the above-described embodiment, the first resurrection display and the second resurrection display are composed of characters related to the characters "FEVER" indicating a "jackpot". The first resurrection display and the second resurrection display are not limited to such a form, and may be composed of information different from the characters "FEVER" indicating the "big hit".

For example, the characters "BONUS" and "blessing" indicating that it is a big hit, the characters "NEXT" and "continuation" indicating that it is V-stock, and the characters indicating that it will develop into a specific SP " Characters such as "CHALLENGE" or "BATTLE" may also be used.

In addition, it may be information that is not related to the effect executed after that or the game state. For example, characters such as "Yume" or "Dream" which are not related to the fact that a big hit will occur after the resurrection effect may be used.

(34) In the above-described embodiment, the first resurrection display and the second resurrection display are part of the characters "FEVER" indicating a big hit. , the first resurrection display and the second resurrection display may consist entirely of the characters "FEVER" indicating a big hit.

(35) In the above-described embodiment, in the resurrection effect, the first resurrection display is composed of a white display color, and the second resurrection display is composed of a black display color that is complementary to white. However, the display color of the first restoration display and the display color of the second restoration display may not be in a complementary color contrast relationship.

(36) In the above embodiment, (i) [1st kind of jackpot] is controlled to the jackpot game state based on the display result of the variable display being "jackpot", and (ii) the display result of the variable display. becomes a ``small win'', a state is set in which the game medium can enter the V winning area in the V winning device by controlling to a small winning game state, and based on the game medium entering the V winning area. [Type 2 jackpot] to control to a jackpot game state. That is, the gaming machine in the above embodiment shows an example of a [first-class + two-class mixed machine] having a pattern of [first-class jackpot] and [two-class jackpot] as a pattern for controlling the (i+ii) jackpot gaming state. However, without being limited to such a form, the various effects shown in the above embodiments may be applied to gaming machines having different game characteristics.

(36-1) For example, the effects shown in the above embodiments may be applied to a game machine having a [V-ST machine] game feature. In the [V-ST machine], after the game ball wins a variable V prize ball device (V lid) described later in the first round of the jackpot game state, it enters the V prize mouth, so that after the jackpot game ends This is a gaming machine having a game property in which variable probability control, which will be described later, is executed over a maximum of 70 times of variable display.

As the game state, a low probability state and a non-time saving state "normal state" (hereinafter referred to as "probability variable control is not executed (game state)" as appropriate), a high probability state, and a time saving state "Probability variation state" (hereinafter referred to as "probability variation control is executed (game state)" as appropriate.) And, shall be provided. For example, the jackpot probability in the normal state is set to 1/319.7, and the jackpot probability in the variable probability state is set to 1/40.

Then, in the [V-ST machine], the probability variable state is the end of any one of the execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times) or the start of the next big hit game state Continue until the condition is met first.

In addition, as the jackpot types, a "normal jackpot" in which the variable probability control is not executed and a "variable probability big hit" in which the variable probability control is executed are provided.

Also, a variable V winning ball device (V lid) is provided inside the big winning hole. Since the mechanism of the variable V winning ball device is the same as that of the V judgment winning device 87, description thereof is omitted. The open state of the variable V winning ball device (V lid) includes a short open state (for example, 0.1 seconds) with a short open period and a long open state with a long open period (for example, 15 seconds). ). In the ``normal big win'', the variable V winning ball device is in the short open state in the first round of the big winning game state, and in the ``probable variable big win'', the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round of the big winning game state. shall be For example, the "normal jackpot" includes a "3R normal jackpot" in which the number of rounds is three.

The big win game state by the "normal big win" is a normal open big win in which the big winning opening is changed to an open state advantageous to the player in the first to third rounds. In addition, in the "normal jackpot", the variable V winning ball device is in a short open state in the first round, making it extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the V winning hole, and variable probability control cannot be executed. Since it cannot be expected, it becomes a substantial "normal jackpot".

The big win game state by the "probability variable big win" is a normal open big win that changes the big winning port to an open state advantageous to the player in the 1st to 3rd rounds/10th round. In addition, in the "variable probability big hit", the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round, so that it is extremely easy to let the game ball enter the V winning hole, and variable probability control can be executed. Since it can be expected, it will be a substantial hit. For example, the "variable probability jackpot" includes a "3R variable probability jackpot" with 3 rounds and a "10R probability fluctuation jackpot" with 10 rounds.

When a big hit occurs based on the variable display of the first special symbol, it is determined as a ``3R normal big hit'' at a rate of 50%, and as a ``3R time-saving big hit'' at a rate of 50%. Also, when a big hit occurs based on the variable display of the second special symbol, it is determined as a "10R probability variable big hit" at a rate of 100%.

In such a [V-ST machine] gaming machine, various effects shown in the above embodiments may be applied.

(36-2) In addition, the effect shown in the above embodiment may be applied to a gaming machine having a [V-probability variable machine] game feature. In [V-probability variable machine], a normal state that is a low probability state and a probability variation state that is a high probability state (game state in which probability variation control is executed) shall be provided. As the jackpot types, "normal jackpot" in which variable probability control is not executed and "variable probability big hit" in which variable probability control is executed are provided. [V-probability changer], after the game ball wins the variable V prize ball device (V cover) described above in the first round of the jackpot game state, by entering the V prize opening, after the jackpot game ends This is a game machine having a game property in which variable probability control is executed over a period until the next big hit occurs.

When a big hit occurs based on the variable display of the first special symbol, it is determined as a ``3R normal big hit'' at a rate of 50%, and as a ``3R time-saving big hit'' at a rate of 50%. Also, when a big hit occurs based on the variable display of the second special symbol, it is determined as a "10R normal big hit" at a rate of 20%, and is determined as a "10R probability variable big hit" at a rate of 80%.

In the gaming machine of such [V-variable machine], various effects shown in the above embodiments may be applied.

(37) In the above embodiment, when the special change effect is executed, the percentage of the final display mode of the active display changing to the blue mode with a low expectation of a big hit is 0%. When the special change effect is executed, the rate of change of the final display mode of the active display to the blue mode with a low expectation of a big hit may be a rate other than 0%.

For example, when the special change effect is executed, the rate at which the final display mode of the active display changes to the blue mode with a low expectation of big win is set to 5%, and the final display mode of the active display is a red mode with a high expectation of big win. and the rate of change to gold mode is set to 95%. At this time, when the special change effect is executed, the final display mode of the active display is highly likely to change to a red mode or a gold mode with a high expectation of a big win, but the final display mode of the active display has a low expectation of a big win. Since there is also a possibility of changing to a blue mode, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the special change effect.

The characteristic portion 05TM described above includes the following configurations.

The game machine of means 1 is
A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
display means (image display device 5);
sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R);
With production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production,
The production control means is
It is possible to execute a specific effect (story SP development effect) that suggests whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the specific effect (story SP development effect) is executed, the specific effect sound (scratch-processed effect sound G) composed of the specially processed dialog sound and the effect sound is output to the sound output means (speaker). 8L, 8R) can be output,
The display means (image display device 5) displays a first display (yellow character A) and a second display (purple character A) different from the first display during the period in which the specific effect sound is being output. can be displayed multiple times (alternately twice each),
The second display is a display color obtained by inverting the display color of the first display (yellow and purple, which are the display colors of the character A, are in a complementary color contrast relationship).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, in the specific effect, the first display and the second display color, which is a display color obtained by inverting the display color of the first display, are displayed a plurality of times in accordance with the output of the specific effect sound. By doing so, it is possible to create a sense of unity between the audio and video in the game machine, and by displaying each of the reversed display colors a plurality of times, the display colors of the first display and the second display can be made to look even more vivid. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest when the specific effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) capable of executing variable display (variable display) and controllable to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
Reservation storage means (RAM 102) for storing, as a reservation storage, information relating to variable display that has not been executed;
Determination means (CPU 103 for executing big hit determination/small hit determination at the time of starting winning) for determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state before the variable display is executed;
sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R);
With production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production,
The production control means is
A first song (song A) composed of a first singing sound and a first accompaniment sound, and a second song different from the first song and composed of a second singing sound and a second accompaniment sound. 2 songs (song X) can be output from the sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R),
capable of outputting the first music piece from the sound output means when being controlled to the advantageous state;
A predetermined effect ( first holding consecutive performance) can be executed,
When the predetermined effect is executed, the second music can be output from the sound output means,
While the first singing sound is not specially processed, at least part of the second singing sound is specially processed (song A is played back without being scratched, while song X is scratched). output)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, when the predetermined effect is executed, the second music is output, so that the special feeling of the predetermined effect can be improved. At least a part of the second singing sound of the second music output when the predetermined effect is executed is specially processed, so that the player is impressed with the second music when the predetermined effect is executed. be able to.

The game machine of means 3 is
A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) capable of executing variable display (variable display) and controllable to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
Reservation storage means (RAM 102) for storing, as a reservation storage, information relating to variable display that has not been executed;
Determination means (CPU 103 for executing big hit determination/small hit determination at the time of starting winning) for determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state before the variable display is executed;
A state control means (CPU 103) that can be controlled to a normal state and a special state (time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be performed than the normal state;
sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R);
With production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production,
The production control means is
When being controlled to the advantageous state, the first music (music A, music B, music C) can be output from the sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R),
A predetermined effect ( first holding consecutive performance) can be executed,
When the predetermined effect is executed, a second music (music X) different from the first music can be output from the sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R),
In the special state controlled after the end of the advantageous state, based on the judgment by the judgment means, it suggests that the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage subject to the judgment is controlled to the advantageous state. A special effect (second holding continuous effect) can be executed,
A gaming machine, wherein the second music (music X) can be output from the sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R) when the special effect (second holding continuous effect) is executed.

According to such a configuration, by outputting the second music different from the first music when the predetermined effect is executed, the special feeling of the predetermined effect can be improved. In addition, when the predetermined performance and the special performance are executed, the common second music is output from the advantageous state to the special state, so that the music is changed when the advantageous state is switched to the special state. can be prevented from decreasing.

The game machine of means 4 is
A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) capable of executing variable display (variable display) and controllable to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
Privilege granting means (step S05TM3070 of the jackpot start performance determination process) for granting a privilege (V stock (holding series, next series));
sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R);
Production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production,
A music receiving means (special operation prompting display BT2) that allows the player to select at least one of a plurality of types of music (music A, music B, and music C),
The production control means is
capable of outputting the music selected by the player from the sound output means when being controlled to the advantageous state;
When being controlled to the advantageous state, a special effect (first V stock effect (first holding continuous effect, first fixed effect)) suggesting that the privilege is granted can be executed,
When the execution of the special effect is started, a special effect sound (scratch-processed effect sound A) composed of a specially processed dialogue sound and a sound effect can be output from the sound output means,
During the period in which the special effect sound is output, the selection of the music by the music receiving means is restricted (the special operation prompting display BT2 is erased and the music cannot be selected).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, when the special performance is being executed, selection of the music is restricted by the music receiving means, so that the special feeling of the special performance can be improved and the selection of the music can be facilitated. is possible, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the special performance.

The game machine of means 5 is
A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
display means (image display device 5);
sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R);
With production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production,
The production control means is
It is possible to execute a specific effect (battle SP effect) that suggests whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state,
The specific effect consists of a first part (first half of battle SP) and a second part (second half of battle SP) executed after the first part,
In the first part and the second part, a special effect (first half of battle SP: CU effect, second half of battle SP: second normal jackpot notification effect) that reduces the visibility of the display means can be executed. can be,
When the special effect is executed in the first part, a first effect sound (effect sound B) can be output from the sound output means,
When the special effect is executed in the second part, a second effect sound (effect sound C2) different from the first effect sound can be output from the sound output means,
The second effect sound is composed of specially processed dialog sound and effect sound (effect sound C2 is scratched).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute an effect that lowers the visibility of the display means in both the special effect of the first part and the special effect of the second part. On the other hand, by specially processing the second performance sound, the production cost of performance and the processing load of performance control can be reduced while clarifying the difference between the special performance of the first part and the special performance of the second part.

The gaming machine of means 6 is
A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
A state control means (CPU 103) that can be controlled to a normal state and a special state (time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be performed than the normal state;
sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R);
With production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production,
The production control means is
When being controlled to the normal state, the first notification sound (normal jackpot notification sound (effect sound C1, effect sound C2, effect sound C3)) for notifying that the control is in the advantageous state is output as the sound. can be output from the means,
When the special state is controlled, a second notification sound (right-handed hitting big hit notification sound (effect sound D1, effect sound D2, effect sound D3)) for notifying that the control is in the advantageous state is performed as the sound. can be output from the output means,
The first notification sound is made up of a specially processed special dialog sound and a special effect sound, while the second notification sound is a specific dialog sound that is not specially processed and a specific effect sound. It is configured (while the normal jackpot notification sound is scratched, the right-handed jackpot notification sound is not scratched),
The output period of the first notification sound is longer than the output period of the second notification sound. .25S)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, by outputting the first notification sound composed of a specially processed special dialog sound and a special effect sound, when the normal state is controlled, an advantageous state is obtained. It is possible to increase the impact when being notified of being controlled. In addition, it is composed of a specific dialogue sound that has not been specially processed and a specific effect sound, and by outputting a second notification sound with a shorter output period than the first notification sound, it is possible to create a sense of speed and exhilaration in a time-saving state. It is possible to prevent the feeling from deteriorating.

The game machine of means 7 is
A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) capable of executing variable display (variable display) and controllable to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
display means (image display device 5);
sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R);
With production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production,
The production control means is
A specific display (suspended display, active display) corresponding to the variable display can be displayed on the display means,
Depending on the display mode of the specific display, it is possible to execute a specific effect (change effect) that suggests whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state,
As the specific display, the specific display of the first mode (normal mode, blue mode) and the specific display of the second mode (red mode, gold mode) in which the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the first mode display and, there is,
As the specific effects, there are a first specific effect (normal change effect) and a second specific effect (special change effect) in which the specific display of the second mode is displayed at a higher rate than the first specific effect. can be,
The production control means is
When the first specific effect is executed, the sound output means does not output a special effect sound composed of a specially processed dialogue sound and a sound effect before the first specific effect is executed. (None of the effect sounds are reproduced and output before the execution of the normal change effect),
When the second specific effect is executed, the special effect sound can be output from the sound output means before the second specific effect is executed (scratch processing is performed before the special change effect is executed). The produced sound EA is reproduced and output)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, by outputting the special effect sound, it is possible to suggest that the second specific effect, which is controlled in a more advantageous state than the first specific effect, will be executed. It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the special effect sound is output, thereby improving the interest.

The game machine of means 8 is
A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state, time saving state) advantageous to a player,
display means (image display device 5);
sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R);
With production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production,
The production control means is
When the control of the advantageous state is started, it is possible to execute a specific effect (shortening rush effect) that suggests that the control of the advantageous state is started,
The specific effect is a effect for causing the display means to display a specific display (start image JSI) suggesting that the control of the advantageous state is to be started, and the specific dialogue is specially processed in relation to the specific display. The game machine is characterized by outputting a specific effect sound (scratch-processed effect sound F) composed of a sound and an effect sound from the sound output means.

According to such a configuration, when the advantageous state control is started, the player is appropriately notified of the timing at which the advantageous state control is started by outputting the specially processed specific effect sound. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage.

The game machine of means 9 is
A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
display means (image display device 5);
sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R);
With production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production,
The production control means is
It is possible to execute a specific effect (story SP development effect) that suggests whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the specific effect (story SP development effect) is executed, the specific effect sound (scratch-processed effect sound G) composed of the specially processed dialog sound and the effect sound is output to the sound output means (speaker). 8L, 8R) can be output,
The display means (image display device 5) displays a first display (yellow character A) and a second display (purple character A) different from the first display during the period in which the specific effect sound is being output. can be displayed multiple times (alternately twice each),
The second display is a display color obtained by inverting the display color of the first display (yellow and purple, which are the display colors of the character A, are in a complementary color contrast relationship).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, in the specific effect, the first display and the second display color, which is a display color obtained by inverting the display color of the first display, are displayed a plurality of times in accordance with the output of the specific effect sound. By doing so, it is possible to create a sense of unity between the audio and video in the game machine, and by displaying each of the reversed display colors a plurality of times, the display colors of the first display and the second display can be made to look even more vivid. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest when the specific effect is executed.

The game machine of means 10 is
A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
display means (image display device 5);
sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R);
With production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production,
The production control means is
A first notification effect (first normal jackpot notification effect) for notifying that the control is in the advantageous state, and a different effect from the first notification effect, and notifying that the control is in the advantageous state. It is possible to execute a second notification effect (second normal jackpot notification effect),
When the first notification effect is executed, a first effect sound (effect sound C1) can be output from the sound output means,
When the second notification effect is executed, a second effect sound (effect sound C2) can be output from the sound output means,
The first effect sound is composed of a specially processed dialogue sound and a sound effect (the [first effect sound C1] of the effect sound C1 is composed of the first dialogue sound C1 and the first sound effect C). ), and the second effect sound is a dialogue sound different from the dialogue sound, and is composed of a specially processed specific dialogue sound and the sound effect (the effect sound C2 [ The first effect sound C2] is composed of the first dialogue sound C2 and the first sound effect C)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, by providing the first notification effect and the second notification effect as effects for notifying that the control is in an advantageous state, either the first notification effect or the second notification effect is provided. Interest can be improved more than when it is not provided. In addition, in the first notification effect and the second notification effect, only the dialogue sound is individually set and the effect sound is made common, thereby differentiating the first notification effect and the second notification effect while achieving the effect. It is possible to reduce the production cost and the storage capacity related to the production.

The gaming machine of means 11 is
A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
display means (image display device 5);
sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R);
With production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production,
The production control means is
It is possible to execute a specific effect (resurrection effect) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state,
When the specific effect is executed, a special effect sound (scratch-processed effect sound J) composed of a specially processed dialogue sound and a sound effect can be output from the sound output means,
when the special effect sound is output, a specific display (first revival display, second revival display) related to the dialogue sound can be displayed on the display means;
During the period in which the special effect sound is output, the specific display of a first size and the specific display of a second size larger than the first size can be displayed on the display means a plurality of times (scratch When the processed effect sound J is reproduced and output, the first restoration display and the second restoration display are alternately displayed twice each on the image display device 5.)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, in the specific effect, by displaying the specific display of the first size and the specific display of the second size related to the special effect sound on the display means, the visual and auditory effects of the player are enhanced. It is possible to realize a production that appeals to In addition, by switching the size of the specific display corresponding to the output timing of the special effect sound, the sense of unity between video and audio can be strengthened, and the interest of the specific effect can be improved.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
display means;
sound output means;
and a production control means capable of executing production,
The production control means is
It is possible to execute a specific effect that suggests whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state,
The specific effect is composed of a first part and a second part executed after the first part,
In the first part and the second part, it is possible to execute a special effect that reduces the visibility of the display means,
When the special effect is executed in the first part, a first effect sound can be output from the sound output means,
when the special effect is executed in the second part, a second effect sound different from the first effect sound can be output from the sound output means;
A gaming machine, wherein the second effect sound is composed of a specially processed dialogue sound and an effect sound.

Images